Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2024-206 - 11/19/2024 - Approved
us CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF GREENWOOD WWTP EFFLUENT PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT No. 24022 PC S ''4�Co fat P0R 1852 URBAN •-•r=P=•• ENGINEERING ' A6yg0="6=i'Vff 2725 Swantner Drive, Corpus Christi TX 78404, (361) 854-3101 TBPE Firm No. 145 TBPLS FIRM No. 10032400 i {st: .: CONFORMANCE SET FOR CONSTRUCTION 1HE E'1-::fE+�?I'�4 0� mr a;�11NE4,1 '* 3.IRA-S :' 44 '.E ASSEMBLED 11/22/2024 Record Drawing Number STL -239 APRIL 2024 Project No: 10796 (26175.C3.03) 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 23 10 Alternates and Allocation 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 33 01 Submittal Register 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls Part S Standard Specifications 025620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement—Provided by City 026206 Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings—Provided by City Part T Technical Specifications TS-1 Technical Special Provisions 2A2[1] Deviations Occasioned By Existing Obstructions 3A[1] Concrete Form Work 313[1] Concrete Reinforcement 3C4[1] Concrete Structures 9K1[2] Painting Yard Piping 11135[1] Wet Pit Submersible Pumps (Wastewater) 13C1[1] General Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements -Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2022 Division/ Title Section PART E ELECTRICAL 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 06 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements -Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2022 PCs A6v Ef CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDDIYYYYI 11/26/2024 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER($), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s), CON PRODUCER 361-727-9300 361-727-9301 NAME"CT AAR Insurance Services Inc. AAR Insurance Services Inc./Benjamin Burns Agency P"ONE � 361-727-9300 FAX Nc: 361-727-9301 IL 1723 E Cherry St Ste 2 ADDARESS,benjamin aargeneral.com _ INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE _ NAIC# Rockport, TX 78382 INSURERA: Crum& Forster Spec Ins. Co. _ 44520 INSURED INSURER B: D&J Utility Services, LLC INSURERC: 113 Candielite Ln. INSURER 13 Papalote,TX 78387 INSURER E: A INSURER F u COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ILTR TYPE OF INSURANCE AD SU Am POLICY NUMBER MMIDR EFF MMILDI D✓YYri LIMITS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ✓ EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE Ft/I OCCUR PREMISES Ea occurrence W $ 100,000 _ BAS-49154-1 11/25/2024 11/25/2025 MED EXP(Anyone person} $5,000 PERSONAL&AOV INJURY $ 1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY PRO- ❑ -- JECT LOC PRODUCTS-COMPIOP AGG $2,000__,000__ OTHER $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT Ea accident _ $ 1,OOQ000 ANY AUTO BAS-49154-1 11/25/2024 11/25/2025 BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS _ ✓ HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTYDAMAGE AUTOS ONLY LV AUTOS ONLY Per acc dent $ Aggregate $2,000,000 UMBRELLAUAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAR HCLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE -$ DEC) RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY YIN _. STATUTE ER ANYPROPPJETORIPARTNERffiXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ OFFICERIMEMBEREXCLUDED? NIA (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-FA EMPLOYEE $ If yes,describe under --"— DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ I DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached it more space Is required) Blanket Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation included in the policy. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 1201 LEONARD ST. ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78401 AU RRED EPRESENTATIYE O 1988-20157ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016103) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ®'V CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDDlYYYY) `.....-" 1 112 112 0 2 4 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Roberto V Valdez NAME: AFFORDABLE INSURANCE OF TEXAS PHONE IC No Ext: 361-854-0207 Alc No: (361)854-7073 E-MAIL SS: affordableinsoftxcyahoo.com 5133 KOSTORYZ RD STE B INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# CORPUS CHRISTI TX 78415 INSURER A: TEXAS MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY 22945 INSURED INSURER B D&J UTILITY SERVICES,LLC INSURER C: INSURER D: 113 CANDLELITE LN INSURER E: SINTON TX 78387 INSURERF: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR _Su BR OF INSURANCE ADOL SR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR POLICYNUMBER MM/DDIYYYY MMIDD COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence I $ MED EXP(Any one person) $ PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERALAGGREGATE $ POLICY JECTPRO ❑ LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $ OTHER: $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ Ea accident ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident L $ UMBRELLALIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAB [J CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION$ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION X SPER TATUTE ERH AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE Y/N E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $ 500,000 A OFFICER/MEMBEREXCLUDED? NIA 0002120029 11/21/2024 11/21/2025 (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 If yes,describe under 500,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. P.O.BOX 9277 CORPUS CHRISTI TX 78469 AUT IZED REPRES IVE ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD TW 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. UCSX492X1095 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: D&J Utility Services LLC Name: US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 113 Candlelite Ln,Sinton,TX 78387 303 Congress Street,Suite 502, Boston MA 02210 Physical address (principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas 303 Congress Street,Suite 502, Boston MA 0221 Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Nebraska Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Telephone (main number): 800 829 2663 Improvements, 24022 Telephone (for notice of claim): 800 829 2663 Local Agent for Surety Name: David M. Layman Award Date of the Contract: November 19, 2024 Address: 13423 Blanco Road#411 Contract Price: $112,000.00 San Antonio,TX 78216 Bond Telephone: (210)7016071 Email Address:david@swriskservices.com Date of Bond: November 20 2024 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Rev 5/2024 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer,agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their heirs,administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. If Contractor does not faithfully construct and complete said Work through the Warranty Period under its contract with Owner, and Owner invokes its contractual rights and declares Contractor in default,Surety shall promptly remedy the default, and at Owner's sole option,Surety shall: 1. Within a reasonable time(but not later than 30 days after Surety receives written notice of Contractor's default), with written notice to Owner,step into and assume the role, all rights and all obligations of the defaulting Contractor under the Contract Documents. Upon assumption of this role, Surety directly shall contract with a Completion Contractor hired/engaged by Surety to complete the Work. The selection of the Completion Contractor must be approved in writing by Owner. Surety shall be responsible for any and all costs incurred,up to the Bond Sum, to complete the Work;or 2. In the event Surety fails to contract with a Completion Contractor within 90 days of receipt of Owner's written notice of Default, Owner may,at Owner's sole discretion,select a Completion Contractor in accordance with Texas law to complete the Work. In this event,Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs, up to the Bond Sum,for Owner's selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work;or 3. At Owner's sole discretion,Surety shall pay Owner the estimated amount for Owner to execute a Project Completion Contract with a Completion Contractor,selected by Owner in accordance with Texas Law,solely to complete the Work. Surety shall pay Owner any and all costs,up to the Bond Sum,for Owner-selected Completion Contractor to complete the Work. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents incorporated by reference in this Bond. Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Rev 5/2024 Contractor as Principal Surety Signature: Signature: Name: 011VT O Tr— Name: David M. Layman Title: /yl�-G T��- /� ryC���(� Title: Attorney-In-Fact Email Address: 61-0111zll- �rl��if ti � �i��� , Email Address: david@swriskservices.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Rev 5/2024 UNITED CASUALTY AND SURETY INSURANCE COMPANY US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company United Surety Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY Agency No: 171492 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,a corporation of the State of Nebraska,and US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company,assumed names of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company(collectively,the Companies),do by these presents make,constitute and appoint: David M.Layman its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead,to execute,acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds,recognizances,undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders,amendments,and consents of surety,providing the bond penalty does not exceed Five Million&00/100 Dollars ($5.000.000.00 ).This Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on December 3111,2024. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the Companies at a meeting duly called and held on the 1"day of July,1993: Resolved that the President,Treasurer,or Secretary be and they are hereby authorized and empowered to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact of the Company,in its name and as its acts to execute and acknowledge for and on its behalf as Surety any and all bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,waivers of citation and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,with power to attach thereto the seal of the Company. Any such writings so executed by such Attorneys-In-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected Officers of the Company in their own proper persons. That the signature of any officer authorized by Resolutions of this Board and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either given for the execution of any bond,undertaking,recognizance or other written obligation in the nature thereof;such signature and seal, when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company,to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereunto affixed,this 14th day of February,2023 UNITED CASUALTY AND SURETY INSURANCE COMPANY S�AE;y'',, �,'Er`'; •, y';e;suR�'' US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company United Surety Insurance Company 'pe = :'�nuvurtv< `r�1 SOS p0"`aRy,f ;6 SEAL =" sent 'w sent. ;y; � �. a: Michael T.Porsch,Treasurer Corporate Seals Commonwealth of Massachusetts County of Middlesex ss: On this 14th day of February,2023 before me,Colleen A.Cochrane,a notary public,personally appeared,Michael T.Porsch,Treasurer of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company,who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity,and that by his signature on the instrument the person(s),or the entity on behalf of which the person(s)acted,executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and seal. COLLEEN A.COCHUNE a (Seal) Notary Public,CommonwealthofMassachusetts otary Public is :Commission Expir 10/27/2028 My Commission Expires 10127/2028 I,Robert F.Thomas,President of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney,executed by said Companies,which is still in full force and effect; furthermore,the resolutions of the Board of Directors,set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the teals of said Companies at Newton,Massachusetts this 20th day of November ,20 24 Corporate Seals z• tai v u. se.u.. Robert F.Thomas,President TO CONFIRM AUTHENTICITY OF'rHIS BOND OR DOCUMENT EMAIL CONFIRMBOND@UNITEDCASUALTY.COM IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para someter una queja: You may call US Casualty and Surety Insurance Usted puede Ilamar al numero de telefono gratis de Company's toll-free telephone number for information US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company's para or to make a complaint at: informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-800-829-2663 1-800-829-2663 You may also write to US Casualty and Surety Usted tambien puede escribir a US Casualty and Insurance Company at: Surety Insurance Company at: 303 Congress Street, Suite 502 303 Congress Street, Suite 502 Boston, MA 02210 Boston, MA 02210 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de to obtain information on companies, coverages, Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion acerca rights or complaints at: de companias, coberturas, derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P. O. Box 149104 P. O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un or about a claim you should contact the company reclamo, debe comunicarse con la compania first.lf the dispute is not resolved, you may contact primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede the Texas Department of Insurance. entonces comunicarse con el departamento (TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo para proposito de informacion y no become a part or condition of the attached se convierte en parte o condicion del documento document. adjunto. Tw 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. UCSX492XIO95 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: D&J Utility Services LLC Name: US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 113 Candlelite Ln,Sinton,TX 78387 303 Congress Street,Suite 502, Boston MA 02210 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas 303 Congress Street,Suite 502, Boston MA 0221 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Nebraska Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone (main number): Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping 800 829 2663 Improvements,24022 Telephone(for notice of claim): 800 829 2663 Local Agent for Surety Name: David M. Layman Award Date of the Contract: November 19, 2024 Address: 13423 Blanco Road#411 Contract Price: $112,000.00 San Antonio,TX 78216 Bond Telephone: (210) 7016071 Email Address:david@swriskservices.com Date of Bond: November 20 2024 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number:1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond 00 61 16-1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Rev 5/2024 Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contractor as Principal " Surety � Signature: �t: �. Signature: Name: 17/11i1/7 FI(t,RI�S �j^ Name: avid M. Layman Title: : 741-,7 C Title: Attorney-In-Fact Email Address: �; 01 G . o 'WG(,i)1^9 Zt,Cow Email Address: david@swrisl<services.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements, 24022 5/2024 UNITED CASUALTY AND SURETY INSURANCE COMPANY US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company United Surety Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY Agency No: 171492 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,a corporation of the State of Nebraska,and US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company,assumed names of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company(collectively,the Companies),do by these presents make,constitute and appoint: David M.Layman its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead,to execute,acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds,recognizances,undertakings or other instruments or contracts of suretyship to include riders,amendments,and consents of surety,providing the bond penalty does not exceed Five Million&00/100 Dollars ($5,000.000.00 1.This Power of Attorney shall expire without further action on December 3111,2024. This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the Companies at a meeting duly called and held on the 111 day of July,1993: Resolved that the President,Treasurer,or Secretary be and they are hereby authorized and empowered to appoint Attorneys-in-Fact of the Company,in its name and as its acts to execute and acknowledge for and on its behalf as Surety any and all bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,waivers of citation and all other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,with power to attach thereto the seal of the Company.Any such writings so executed by such Attorneys-in-Fact shall be binding upon the Company as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected Officers of the Company in their own proper persons. That the signature of any officer authorized by Resolutions of this Board and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either given for the execution of any bond,undertaking,recognizance or other written obligation in the nature thereof;such signature and seal, when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Company,to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereunto affixed,this 14th day of February,2023 UNITED CASUALTY AND SURETY INSURANCE COMPANY US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company United Surety Insurance Company �0voa,rF ?;,`'.• SEAL :;�? ~? SEAL y n,,,a`` ...,,,,,`� �'oanuu`no• Michael T.Porsch,Treasurer Corporate Seals Commonwealth of Massachusetts County of Middlesex ss: On this 14th day of February,2023 before me,Colleen A.Cochrane,a notary public,personally appeared,Michael T.Porsch,Treasurer of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company,who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he executed the same in his authorized capacity,and that by his signature on the instrument the person(s),or the entity on behalf of which the person(s)acted,executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand and seal. COLLEEN a COCHUNE 4 � �P.brlc � �titer (Seal) Notary Public,Commonwealth of Massachuseotary Commission Expir� :10/27/2028 My Commission Expires 10/27/2028 I,Robert F.Thomas,President of United Casualty and Surety Insurance Company,US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company and United Surety Insurance Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney,executed by said Companies,which is still in full force and effect; furthermore,the resolutions of the Board of Directors,set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Newton,Massachusetts this 20th day of November _,20 24 Corporate Seals ; etni ra. srnt =- Robert F.Thomas,President TO CONFIRM AUTHENTICITY OF THIS BOND OR DOCUMENT EMAIL:CONFIRMBOND@UNITEDCASUALTY.COM IMPORTANT NOTICE AVISO IMPORTANTE To obtain information or make a complaint: Para obtener informacion o para someter una queja: You may call US Casualty and Surety Insurance Usted puede Ilamar al numero de telefono gratis de Company's toll-free telephone number for information US Casualty and Surety Insurance Company's para or to make a complaint at: informacion o para someter una queja al: 1-800-829-2663 1-800-829-2663 You may also write to US Casualty and Surety Usted tambien puede escribir a US Casualty and Insurance Company at: Surety Insurance Company at: 303 Congress Street, Suite 502 303 Congress Street, Suite 502 Boston, MA 02210 Boston, MA 02210 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance Puede comunicarse con el Departamento de to obtain information on companies, coverages, Seguros de Texas para obtener informacion acerca rights or complaints at: de companias, coberturas, derechos o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Puede escribir al Departamento de Seguros de Texas: P. O. Box 149104 P. O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Fax: (512) 475-1771 Web: http:H www.tdi.state.tx.us Web: http://www.tdi.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@1!4i.state.tx.us i.state.tx.us E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.state.tx.us PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: DISPUTAS SOBRE PRIMAS O RECLAMOS: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium Si tiene una disputa concerniente a su prima o a un or about a claim you should contact the company reclamo, debe comunicarse con la compania first.lf the dispute is not resolved, you may contact primero. Si no se resuelve la disputa, puede the Texas Department of Insurance. entonces comunicarse con el departamento (TDI). ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: UNA ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: This notice is for information only and does not Este aviso es solo para proposito de informacion y no become a part or condition of the attached se convierte en parte o condicion del documento document. adjunto. ,�yyUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on November 19, 2024, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and D&J Utility Services, LLC (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements Project No: 24022 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Urban Engineering, LLC 2725 Swantner Drive Corpus Christi,Texas 78404 mmaroney@urbaneng.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Jiangang(Daniel) Deng, P.E City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,areas defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 112,000.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 00 52 23-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Febwa ffi re a 9?1s" Rebecca Huerta 12/04/2024 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 12/03/2024 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services M2024-170 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 11/19/2024 RH/SB Assistant City Attorney 12/03/2024 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR ICI 210 (Seal Below) By: David Flores Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Managing Principle person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 113 Canlelite Ln Financial Officer Address Sinton Texas 78387 City State Zip 361-814-3757 Phone Fax David.dnius@gmail.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 CIVCAS, RFB 5974 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Report Created On:8/7/2024 7:12:36 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total General $10,000.00 Effluent Pump Replacement $87,000.00 Total $97,000.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total Mandatory Allocation $15,000.00 Total $15,000.00 General No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization (Not to Exceed 5%) LS 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 A2 Bonds and Insurance AL 1 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 Subtotal: $10,000.00 Effluent Pump Replacement No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 131 Effluent Pump Replacement(All work for LS 1 $52,000.00 $52,000.00 the improvements included in the Contract Documents that are not specifically described in another Bid Item) B2 Electrical Improvements LS 1 $35,000.00 $35,000.00 Subtotal: $87,000.00 Mandatory Allocation No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 Utility Unforeseen Allocation AL 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 Subtotal: $15,000.00 CIVCAS i RFB 5974 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Report Created On:8/7/2024 7:12:36 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 08/02/2024 20:53:40 PM Addendum No.2 08/02/2024 20:53:41 PM CIVCAS, RFB 5974 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements,24022 Report Created On:8/7/2024 7:12:36 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans RFB 5974 Plans 8/2/2024 10:15:14 AM Addenda Addendum No. 1 8/2/2024 8:15:37 AM Addenda Addendum No.2 8/2/2024 9:11:00 AM Invitation To Bid RFB 5974 Invitation to Bid and Specs 8/2/2024 8:18:24 AM 00 30 01 BID FORM Project Name: Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements Project Number: 24022 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Designer: Urban Engineering, LLC By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: D&J Utility Services LLC (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: L'- ,/ (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: David Flores Jr (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Managing Principle (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: a4a (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 92-1935359 Address for Notices: 113 Candlelite Ln, Sinton, Tx 78387 Phone: 361-814-3757 Email: david.dnjus@gmail.com Bid Form 00 30 01-Page 1 of 2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements-Project No.24022 Rev 8/2019 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF GREENWOOD WWTP EFFLUENT PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT No. 24022 PC S ''4�Co fat P0R 1852 URBAN •-•r=P=•• ENGINEERING ' A6yg0="6=i'Vff 2725 Swantner Drive, Corpus Christi TX 78404, (361) 854-3101 TBPE Firm No. 145 TBPLS FIRM No. 10032400 i {st: .: CONFORMANCE SET FOR CONSTRUCTION 1HE E'1-::fE+�?I'�4 0� mr a;�11NE4,1 '* 3.IRA-S :' 44 '.E ASSEMBLED 11/22/2024 Record Drawing Number STL -239 APRIL 2024 Project No: 10796 (26175.C3.03) �Go uSC Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping o Improvements Project No.24022 Walk ADDENDUM No. 1 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI FINANCE AND PROCUREMENT Addendum No: 1 Addendum Date: July 30, 2024 Bidder must acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum in its bid. Failure of the Bidder to acknowledge this Addendum may result in City's rejection for the Bidder for non-responsiveness. ATTACHMENTS: 1. REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATIONS AND RESPONSES 2. Quote # 2024-COR-0057- Flygt Equipment Page 1 of 1 U J J Z N h w 0 Q Z O C7 � Z Z w o 0 o Q m n n n m p of N t � v Ln a) +� a) \ A2 +, (D 8 8 +L U O C) C O Q i �' i �- -0 °U X C CCO a-+ B S ` C � U y 'J O O N 0 N N U S$i a1 N O C U u 0 y 1�' m T U 7 o a O W v Mgm D 9 LL c H O WERE W a) r u I L F O N a) 00 W U co a) 0a) _ W qgF — CL C U0 E C � N D `� 7 °; c C) O M L o E -0 3 D [L d tD C +� U Q u Q Q °� m -0 w 0 d H .I I W a) CO 00 ~ 0 m O '� +� O C O ai Q c-I C N a) a3 +t ai O � C O a3 a) W O n u N U a3 Q ob O C7 0 M N L Q v 0 ` E u) I\ U M a) QJ QJ N -0 O C Q a OL a) °- O Lr) M O O_ + M [0 +' N E N m Q) i C > > 0 Y vOi X M 0 � Q M O Ln Q O c LO +� c v w d -0 x m > a5 O +� O O (D O -0 _ a) a5 as C E CD O J C w r-4 -0 -Se ++ U U C y U Q U C w O C w v j (6 o C O ° do Q —Z ° u -0 Q o C 3 o 3 N ° a => N � d a i N .O N 0 (U � a) n a) a, o o o o C N Q1 ° a * QNU -0 O UO = N V -U 3OZ L" aCCW uoOO p pa) ai — O0_ O > O v= o cncn O N0a w v U o U s a N O wa COp Cof0 a) Lu a) O _ O WN "t a O Om _ m 0 E v> ° a) E v a Crn a as w U O w .o M 'Z +_ -° � o0 co° o as as C) v a o t O a o C u o a O O aro -0 O a v -0 u m cn M u O v Z a 0- 3: a E � y c N M m 41 2 \ J z § CN k z 0 8 / § e a) \ \ § R 0 E 7 2 } � \ \ / J \ \ a) a) 0- a) \ 0 \N c / 7 z 2 = \ \ \ \E \ % fru = 2 � \ ) v \ \ _ § / } / / 7 r ƒ G \ / \ 0 S / J + E /_ f \ \ \ k R / a 7 / 7 \ 0 = g R k \ / k / G Cl. = \ O - - S — / 2 \ \ CLr f = E / u / 8- CD cu b / > 0 E / \ 0 \ E % v [ / > 9 2 ) c 4 0 5 u e = _ 6 2 / ® \ � \ � \ j Cf 0 \ \ f 2 c \ o § ) § 0 m 0 / £ u § / z S \ / \ \ m \ \ w k � / xylem Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Flygt Products April 16, 2024 2029 North Lexington Blvd. Corpus Christi, TX 78409 Tel 361/879-0031 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Fax 361/879-0044 PO BOX 9277 CORPUS CHRISTI TX 78469-9277 Quote # 2024-COR-0057 Project Name: Greenwood Effluent-Golf Course Job Name: Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. is pleased to provide a quote for the following Flygt equipment. Pump and Control Panel Qty Description Extended Price 1 Flygt Model NP-3202.185 4" volute Submersible pump equipped with $ 41,460.00 a 460 Volt / 3 phase / 60 Hz 72 HP 3550 RPM motor. 273 impeller, 1 x 50 Ft. length of SUBCAB 3x50+2G35/2+S(2x0,5) submersible cable, FLS leakage detector 1 START UP,FLYGT 2-TP MODELS: 3000,7000,8000 $ 3,140.00 1 CONNECTION,DISCH 4X4" Cl $ 936.72 1 Simplex Control Panel $ 10,542.40 1 MINI-CASII/FUS 120/24VAC,24VDC $ 381.50 Pump and Control Panel Price $ 56,460.62 Total Price $ 56,460.62 Freight Charge $ 3,779.00 Total Price $ 60,239.62 Terms & Conditions This order is subject to the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale — Xylem Americas effective on the date the order is accepted which terms are available at http://www.xyleminc.com/en-us/Pages/terms- conditions-of-sale.aspx and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the agreement between the parties. Purchase Orders: Please make purchase orders out to: Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Freight Terms: 3 DAP - Delivered At Place 08 - Jobsite (per IncoTerms 2020) See Freight Payment (Delivery Terms) below. Taxes: State, local and other applicable taxes are not included in this quotation. Back Charges: Buyer shall not make purchases nor shall Buyer incur any labor that would result in a back charge to Seller without prior written consent of an authorized employee of Seller. Page 1 of 3 FLYGT a xylem brand Addendum No. 1 Page 1 of 15 Shortages: Xylem will not be responsible for apparent shipment shortages or damages incurred in shipment that are not reported within two weeks from delivery to the jobsite. Damages should be noted on the receiving slip and the truck driver advised of the damages. Please contact our office as soon as possible to report damages or shortages so that replacement items can be shipped and the appropriate claims made. Terms of Delivery: PP/Add Order Position Terms of Payment: 100% N30 after invoice date. Xylem's payment shall not be dependent upon Purchaser being paid by any third party unless Owner denies payment due to reasons solely attributable to items related to the equipment being provided by FLYGT. Validity: This Quote is valid for thirty (30) days. Please note that this pricing is valid for 30 days and contingent upon final approval of submittals and release to fabrication by (within 90 days of bid date). This quotation is subject to change if any changes to the specifications or plans are made that alter the scope of supply. Schedule: Please consult your local Flygt Branch Office to get fabrication and delivery lead times. COVID 19: Our current delivery lead-times are forecasted estimates only due to the outbreak of the COVID-19 virus pandemic and its global effects on commerce, supply chain, and logistics. Xylem will, however, use all commercially reasonable efforts to minimize any delivery delay impacts. Time of Delivery: Approx. 15 working weeks after receipt of order acceptance and approved submittals. Thank you for the opportunity to provide this quotation. Please contact us if there are any questions. Sincerely, - �ja,wtll Frank Pardo Direct Sales Representative Phone: (361) 808-7867 Cell: (956) 638-5256 frank.pardo@xylem.com Page 2 of 3 FLYGT a xylem brand Addendum No. 1 Page 2 of 15 xylem Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Flygt Products Customer Acceptance This order is subject to the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale — Xylem Americas effective on the date the order is accepted which terms are available at http://www.xyleminc.com/en-us/Pages/terms- conditions-of-sale.asl)x and incorporated herein by reference and made a part of the agreement between the parties. A signed copy of this Quote is acceptable as a binding contract. Purchase Orders: Please make purchase orders out to: Xylem Water Solutions USA, Inc. Quote #: 2024-COR-0057 Customer Name: CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Job Name: Total Amount. (excluding freigh �- — Signature: Name: (PLEASE PRINT) Company/Utility: V PO: Address: Date: Phone: Email: Fax: Page 3 of 3 FLYGT a xylem brand Addendum No. 1 Page 3 of 15 N P 3202 SH 3— 273 Patented self cleaning semi-open channel impeller,ideal for pumping in most wastewater applications.Modular based design with high 31F adaptation grade. a xylem brand Technical specification Curves according to: Water,pure Water,pure[100%],39.2°F,62.42lb/ft',1.6891E-5 W s In Head. 370 360 350 340 330 320 310 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 1/ 220 I 210 f� 200 ' 10 180 71D I 60 t_ 50 140 13D 2 230mm 120 11C 10o 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 -- 10 J 0 L .2.A. T -T--r—T—J I I I 0 200 400 600 800 1000 [US 9.p.m.] Curve:ISO 9906 Nominal(mean)data shown.Under-and over-performance from this data should be expected due to standard manufacturing tolerances. Configuration Please consult your local Flygt representative for performance guarantees. Motor number Installation type N3202.18530-27-2AA-W P-Semi permanent,Wet 72hp Impeller diameter Discharge diameter 230 mm 4 inch Pump information Material Impeller diameter Impeller 230 m m Hard-Iron Discharge diameter 4 inch Inlet diameter 150 mm Maximum operating speed 3550 rpm Number of blades 2 Max.fluid temperature 40"C Project Xylect-21849068 Created by Frank Pardo Block Created on 2/14/2024 Last update 2/14/2024 aoy-ma.rn oa. Ua goo p(, 72.0-3DN12024(-d 126) OE-0240945 Xylem:USA-INT Addendum No. 1 Page 4 of 15 NP 3202 SH 3- 273 Technical specification IF Motor-General a Xylem brand Motor number Phases Rated speed Rated power N3202.185 30-27-2AA-W 3— 3550 rpm 72 hp 72hp Approval Number of poles Rated current Stator variant No 2 78 A 1 Frequency Rated voltage Insulation class Type of Duty 60 Hz 460 V H S1 Version code 185 Motor-Technical Powerfactor-1/1 Load Motor efficiency-1/1 Load Total moment of inertia Starts per hour max. 0.93 92.5% 4.78 lb ft2 30 Power factor-3/4 Load Motor efficiency-3/4 Load Starting current,direct starting 0.92 93.0% 550 A Power factor-1/2 Load Motor efficiency-1/2 Load Starting current,star-delta 0.88 92.5% 183 A Project Xylect-21849068 Created by Frank Pardo Block Created on 2/14/2024 Last update 2/14/2024 aoy,a�,�BSIo� oar�aslo� uses e,-p(, 72.0-30-024(-d 126) OE-0240945 Xylem:U54-INT Addendum No. 1 Page 5 of 15 4638 Ref.line 378 rn Z 8 f 9 z o' f i i i 272 5$ 22 412 3" Guide bars i a', 97 b 4" o Ln = 1 r�l� ❑Z Z N00 F U-A00 Ln 48 i Noo N I � I E I 0J (4x) s Ref. line rI-00 N00 � L � 97 --T VIEW ❑Z — ❑Z o Weight (lbs) Pump Discharge with cooling 1215 95 jacket * Only applicable for intermittent duty. without cooling Consult the IOM for more info. jacket 1105 95 WQW 04" Scds Date FP 132021 SH W f4- 1:40 220921 �mP Dmng aam6er RevYlm 095,185,350,390,660,670 �bn 7632100 5 Addendum o. age o STACOn BILL OF MATERIAL I BY: MHM QUOTE NO. 170768AA Date: 05/13/24 Rev: JOB NAME GREENWOOD S# 24-0540 CUSTOMER XYLEM, TX, SAN ANTIONO PO# 840415 QTY LEGEND DESCRIPTION (MFG. PART # Check Off 1 ENCLOSURE lAY FG HOFFMAN A30H3612GQRLP 1 SUB PANEL HOFFMAN A30P36 1 GS ENCLOSURE DOOR GROUNDING STRAP ERICO 556610 1 PDB TERMINAL BLOCK 175 A. (1-6) BUSSMANN 16021-3 [ ] Line 2/0 to 14 —Load 4 to 14 1 N ISOLATED NEUTRAL BLOCK 175 A. BUSSMANN 16220-1 [ ] 1-4 Line 2/0 to 14 —Load 4 to 14 2 G GROUND BUSS #8-1 SQD PK7GTA 1 MB1 MOTOR BREAKER SQD HDL36150 1 CCB CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER SQD QOU115 1 MS MOTOR STARTER SIZE 4 SQD 8536-SF01V02S 3 OL OVERLOAD HEATERS SQD CC 156 [ ] STANDARD TRIP SZ 4 TABLE_16) 1 OLR OVERLOAD RESET SQD 9066-RA1 1 CCT CONTROL TRANSFORMER SQD 9070-T75D23S12 15 TS TERMINAL STRIP SQD 9080-GK6 1 *F1 FUSE BUSSMANN KTK-R-5/600V 3 *F24 FUSE TIME DELAY AC-DC BUSSMANN FNQ-R-3/600V 3 *F5-7 FUSE PHASE MONITOR). BUSSMANN KTK-R-1/2/600V 1 FUSE HOLDER 3 POLE BUSSMANN BCM603-3PQ 1 ETM ELAPSED TIME METER INTERMATIC FWZ72K120ST 1 RL1 PILOT LIGHT RED 120VAC, PTT SQD 9001SKT38LRR9 2 PL1-2 PILOT LIGHT AMBER 120VAC, PTT SQD 9001SKT38LYA9 1 PL3 RUN LIGHT GREEN)(24VAC, PTT SQD 9001 SKT35LGG9 1 R1 CONTROL RELAY (24VAC, 11 PIN IDEC RR3PA-ULAC24V 1 11 PIN SOCKET IDEC SR3P-05 1 PM DUAL VOLTAGE PHASE MONITOR MPE 001-DVM-1212 [ ] 12 Pin 200-240V or 425-525V 1 12 PIN SOCKET MPE SD12-PC 1 TH THERMOSTAT HEATER N.C. FINDER 7T.81.0.000.2403 1 HT HEATER 50W HEATRON HEATFLEX 020050UJ 1 SPD SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE SQD SDSA3650 [ ] 600Y/347V (3PH, 4W 1 SW OFF/ON SWITCH SQD 9001-SKS11B [ ] 1 NO CONTACT SQD 9001-KA2 NOTES: *OR EQUAL 170768AA-GREENWOOD Addendum No. 1 Page 7 of 15 t NOTES: *OR EQUAL PACKING LIST Quote#• 170768AA I Date: 05/13/24 Rev: SPARE PARTS QTY LEGEND DESCRIPTION MFG PART # 1 " F1 FUSE BUSSMANN KTK-R-5/600V 3 * F2-4 FUSE TIME DELAY AC-DC BUSSMANN FNQ-R-3/600V 3 ; F5-7 FUSE PHASE MONITOR BUSSMANN KTK-R- 1/2/600V SHIPPED LOOSE QTY LEGEND DESCRIPTION MFG IPART # 1 CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER � SQD 7400-1S1FSS [ ] 1KVA STAINLESS STEEL SUPPLIED BY PUMP REP IN THE FIELD FLOAT REGULATOR 2 FR FLOAT REGULATOR ?? ?? I l 170768AA-GREENWOOD Addendum No. 1 Page 8 of 15 PARTS PROVIDED BY OTHERS FOR INSTALLATION BY STACON Quote # : 170768AA _ ate : _ _ Rev Job-Name . GREENWOOD SN : 24-0540 Customer : XYLEM, TX, SAN ANTIONO PO : 840415 "ALL CUSTOMER PROVIDED PARTS SHIPPED TO STA-CON FOR INSTALLATION MUST BE TAGGED WITH THE CUSTOMER NAME, PROJECT NAME AND EITHER OUR QUOTE NUMBER OR PANEL PO NUMBER. PARTS NOT PROPERLY TAGGED WILL BE RETURNED TO SENDER AND THIS WILL DELAY PANEL ESTIMATED DELIVERY DATES. PARTS PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER FOR STACON TO INSTALL QTY LEGEND DESCRIPTION MFG PART # 1 MC1 PUMP MONITOR RELAY MPE MINICAS [ ] (ADD .1 Uf 1000V CAPACITOR TO MINICAS PINS 5,7 11 PIN SOCKET (REVERSE) OMRON P3GA-11 [ ] 170768AA-GREENWOOD Addendum No. 1 Page 9 of 15 sTAcon ENGINEERING SUBMITTALS -- FILE JOB NAME- GREENWOOD QUOTE NO- 170768AA Rev: DATE- 05/13/24 CUSTOMER XYLEM,TX, SAN ANTIONO ELECTRICAL SERVICE [X] 480Y/277V THREE PHASE (3 HOT+ GRD) [ ] 120/240V HI LEG DELTA THREE PHASE (3 HOT + N +GRD) [ ] 208Y/120V THREE PHASE (3 HOT+ N + GRD) [ ] 120/240V SINGLE PHASE(2 HOT+ N + GRD) [ ] 120V(HOT+N +GRD) (1) SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES AND POWER TRAIN REQUIREMENTS ARE BASED ON SERVICE SELECTION AS STATED ABOVE. UNLESS CONFIRMED OTHERWISE BY THE CUSTOMER ANY MISSING, INCORRECT OR DAMAGED COMPONENTS DUE TO A DIFFERENT SERVICE CONFIGURATION ARE NOT THE PANEL MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY. _ CONTROL SYSTEM TYPE OF CONTROL PANEL- SIMPLEX SENSING DEVICE- FLOATS NUMBER OF MOTORS- 1 MOTOR H.P.- 72 HP (FLA 78A) ENCLOSURE: MATERIAL- FIBERGLASS NEMA RATING- 4X SIZE- 30" X 36" X 12" MODIFICATIONS - DEAD FRONT MOUNTING STYLE- WALL MOUNT _ PRODUCTION REQUIREMENT [ ]APPROVAL WAIVED [ ] APPROVED AS SUBMITTED DRAWINGS APPROVED AS NOTED, "PROVIDE CLEAR AND PRECISE COMMENTS" APPROVAL SIGNATURE: 170768AA-GREENWOOD Addendum No. 1 Page 10 of 15 0 5 w 30 a O O O a w W G\2 w � M 7 8 9 1 2z co � A o 6 cc o 1 o 36 4 Fyn OliP y¢M N Y 3 No cua cu c 10 O ca Ins- Lai till OUTER DOOR HAS BEEN REMOVED FOR CLARITYgg DEADFRDNT SHOWN pZ �wBwJ I - CCB CONTROL BREAKER igsf 2 - MB1 MOTOR BREAKER 1 3 - MC1 MINICAS PUMP MONIT❑R RELAY 4 - HOA HAND OFF AUTO SWITCH 5 - ETM ELAPSED TIME METERa 6 - RL1 PUMP RUNS" 7 - PL1 OFF LEVEL LIGHT �� � 8 - PL2 ON LEVEL LIGHT 9 - PL3 HIGH LEVEL LIGHT = =� 10 - OVERLOAD RESET PAGE 1 OF 2 Addendum No. 1 Page 11 of 15 0 0-4 ul 5 w a A � p � I 27 1 A � O O W G\2 W� E- crr a 4 5 � p 2 �1 � z co 7 � o ow 33 11 12 8 m o0 �Yacu rl 6 to CL N O Na, a O ca 9 14 13 15 i LAY❑UT MAY VARY 1 - GROUNDS Vie' 2 - N NEUTRAL BLOCK 3 - SPD SURGE PR❑TECTION DEVICE 4 - CCB CONTROL BREAKER 5 - MB1 MOTOR BREAKER 1 6 - MSi MOTOR STARTER 1 � 7 - F FUSE BLOCKS ' 6" K'N� 9 - HT STRIP HEATERR(50W) AND TERMINALS �s 10 - R CONTROL RELAYS 11 - CCT CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER 12 - TH THERMOSTAT REMOTE 13 - TS-B TERMINAL STRIP B 16 14 - TS-C TERMINAL STRIP C 15 - TS-D TERMINAL STRIP D 16 - CPT CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER (REMOTE) 1S1FSS FRONT VIEW PAGE 2 OF 2 Addendum o. 1 Page 12 of 15 *COPPER WIRE 75'C OR ABOVEe Z C _ b-4 SPD Cn MB1 MS1 OL'S 480V_o o ;F-o-�JCro-z�� PUMP 1 1 3W+GRD 1 05 AF/78AT F 1Xro- _ FLA 78A ^ 2 PM 175-7 I C) I , c) 3 3 5 12 1/2A r_ REMOTE _ A d4 CPT IKVA 2 I 4 D11F2 3A D3 N. GND BAR /�r 14 AWG CONTROL WIR i �I — ru,-1 1 W CQ WHERE APPLICABLE 480V 20VI M� W I WN w F1 M 5 Ina — SM iE � .—4 IF3 3A ---- 6 1 FI 7 CiC-.B 6 RECEPTACLE 14-D 5A 15A RLI co R PUMP RUN F = 8 MS1 g ETM ELAPSED 'p O 9 TIME METER —4 PL3 t-a MSl to G PUMP OFF o 10 =Ix �L-o o rn it CU Ln le PM 11 OF�ON f2 RI f8 MCl fq MCI 15 OLl 1B M 1 MSlOR 9T�ARTER Ln NOL 12 8 � --7�1� i 3 11 8 OLl - ]Z 13 O 14 Q IS y When power Is applied, the overtemp contac�changestate if the motor's temperature sensors) 16 high temp. MINICAS (MCI) 12,1Z 27 6 1120V3 10 5 f7 Cl THERMALS 18 7 I.luF C2 SEAL FAIL ~ GFg 1000V I5Fg 19 b TH f8 HT g � HEATER 50W B 20 ll 11 12 HT HT �,�o Fa20 21 dill, 3ACCT �2ov "F 75VA , gb'gy��+� 22 24V 21 22 1154 23 F �Mo PL24d�i A ON LEVEL 24y3M`F FR2 24 I RI 12,25 25 B3---01`---B4 2 10 b ON RI 26 3 1 PL1 FRI 28 27 �1 --'1�--- A` OFF LEVEL 28 BI b B2 OFF LAST WIRE #24 29 30 PAGE I OF 2 Addendum No. 1 Page 13 of 15 0 5 w a NonintrinslccAty safe wirin ternlnals /� TERMINAL STRIP B (TS-B) TERMINAL STRIP D (TS-D) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Ox REMOTE A II , 2 I CONTROL POWER TRASFORMER (CPT> Z L b OFF — b[IN NW C+ 0 TERMINAL STRIP C (TS-C) Cvj ISF&TI j oly LPUMP o LJ ELSE N¢M V7]C 0 p NIL Q Imi cc a A�g�8 dills 8 INDICATES DEVICES AND € ' CONNECTIONS BY INSTALLER O ��y Nw DEVICES ON THE BOTTOM OF TERMINAL STRIPylr3o FUSE REPLACEMENT CHART ARE REMOTE ENTERING CONTROL PANEL. XmW FUSE REPLACEMENT DEVICES ON THE TOP OF TERMINAL STRIP gel F1 KTK-R-5/600V ARE CONTACTS LEAVING THE CONTROL PANEL. F2-4 FNQ-R-3/600V F5-7 KTK-R-1/2/600V SQD !mound Busbar T&B BLACKBURN LUG PX7GTA, P102GTA, P)OSCTA TORQUE TIONTENING CUSTOMER XYLEM WATER SOLUTIONS wire KoLnge Torque a ange crew ype JOB NAME GREENWOOD AWG CU-AL lb-In. & Wrench Size Torque 14-10 CU 12-10 AL AWG CU lb-In. ENCLOSURE UL TYPE RATING, UL TYPE 1 - VOLTAGE 480V PHASE 3 HZ 60 - (SLOTTED) B 1 25 H.P. #1 72 #2 X #3 X #4 X Two 14 or 12 CU, (SLOTTED) 4- Two 12 or 10 AL 25 (SLOTTED) 2-2/0 50 F.L.A. 78A X X /16 KX) e1V 100 TOTAL F.L.A. 80A SQD Terminal Block /I H X> 3/ 0- 50 275 SERIAL # 24-0540 DATEi 2024 GM + GR6 (3/8 HEX) 500- 0' 450x q /8 EX> 750-0550 SCCR- 10KA SYMMETRICAL RMS, 480V. MAX. re ange or ue w=UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED MANUFACTURED BYE AWG CU lb-In. ON CONNECTOR K6> 1-1 STA CON INC 2525 S.OBT APOPKA FL 32703 ( j2S GRO a.2-!jS-20 PAGE 2 OF 2 Addendum No. 1 Page 14 of 15 SHOP CHECK SHEET Quote#: 170768AA , Date: 05/13/24 Rev: P.O.# 840415 Ship Date H.P.'s 72 # PUMPS 1 VOLTAGE 480 V PHASE 3 DRIPSHIELD N/A SERIAL# 24-0540 DEADFRONT ALUM. ENCLOSURE TYPE 4X MATL. FIBERGLASS (SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS Check OFF Wire size from PDB to MB wire size- Wire size from MB to MS wire size- RED WARNING LABEL [X] *WARNING—BEFORE APPLYING POWER: ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CAN BECOME LOOSE DURING SHIPPING. TIGHTEN ALL SCREWS, AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE TO WIRES AND COMPONENTS. WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals, which are known to the State of California to cause [X] cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. For more information go to www.P65Warninas.ca. ov. CHECKED PARTS ROOM FOR ANY PARTS TO BE SHIPPED WITH THE PANEL Wire Numbers—Type Legends and Legend Sheet Ground Lugs Overload Heater Chart Pump Data Sheet Drawings on Door Picture of Panel UL 508A US: I Spare Parts [X] In Panel See Packing List [ l [ ] In Separate Box See Packing List L l Wired by: Subpanel: Deadfront: Tester: Inspector: Comments: 170768AA-GREENWOOD Addendum No. 1 Page 15 of 15 �Go uSC Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping o Improvements Project No.24022 Walk ADDENDUM No. 2 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI FINANCE AND PROCUREMENT Addendum No: 2 Addendum Date: August 2, 2024 Bidder must acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum in its bid. Failure of the Bidder to acknowledge this Addendum may result in City's rejection for the Bidder for non-responsiveness. ATTACHMENTS: 1. REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATIONS AND RESPONSES Page 1 of 1 _ g : _ £ 3 / \ \ o - \ 0 7co \ � \ \ / 0 & % _ , { \ / y § , . on / u \ co « a } / E \ \ / / w E 2 E 7 - ®& E _ } ) \ \ / / _ - u / g , e/ % $ , D 2 % _ \ \ [ \ j \ u rn 2 = u k \ m 2 \ ( 7 ( \ \ ) A 00 Z \ \ o w \ u 2 / 2 - E 2 ® 2 / e \ _ � � � � \ [ 2 >1 \ \ / ® / u J 7 \ E � � � o u / y a / & / ao _ C ± y o e - ~ 0 = / \ k � ± \ > \ / / \ E E m } d \ \ \ \ o 2 § ƒ t\ \ u a CL 0 \ } 2 - = ® = 2 \ \ \ _ \ D \ \ 2 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 00 01 00 Table of Contents 00 01 02 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 23 10 Alternates and Allocation 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 33 01 Submittal Register 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 00 Temporary Controls Part S Standard Specifications 025620 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement—Provided by City 026206 Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings—Provided by City Part T Technical Specifications TS-1 Technical Special Provisions 2A2[1] Deviations Occasioned By Existing Obstructions 3A[1] Concrete Form Work 313[1] Concrete Reinforcement 3C4[1] Concrete Structures 9K1[2] Painting Yard Piping 11135[1] Wet Pit Submersible Pumps (Wastewater) 13C1[1] General Requirements Table of Contents 00 0100- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements -Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2022 Division/ Title Section PART E ELECTRICAL 26 01 26 Electrical Testing 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19.01 Wire Connections and Devices 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 06 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements -Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2022 000102 LIST OF DRAWINGS Sheet No. DRAWING TITLE 1 Title Sheet and Index 2 Effluent Pump Replacement Plan and Sections 3 Electrical Site Plan 4 Electrical Demolition 5 Electrical Plans 6 Electrical Elevations and Sections 7 Electrical One-Line Diagrams and Schematics 8 Electrical Details List of Drawings 00 01 02 Green Wood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 ,�yyUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on , is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements Project No: 24022 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Urban Engineering, LLC 2725 Swantner Drive Corpus Christi,Texas 78404 mmaroney@urbaneng.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel, PMP City of Corpus Christi—Engineering Services 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. No. 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$500 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Agreement 00 52 23-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Urban Engineering, LLC Bath Engineering Corporation ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.1) are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 3. A total of 22 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 22 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: None. SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. 1. Environmental Reports include the following: None. B. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form 2. Premises—Operations 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 5. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑ Required ® Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ® Required ❑ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- ® ❑ Required ❑ Not Required owned property Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS A. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise to sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. B. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Juneteenth June 19 Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor must perform at least 50 percent of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 "General Decision Number: TX20240288 01/05/2024 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20230288 State: Texas Construction Type: Building Counties: Aransas,Nueces and San Patricio Counties in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). Note: Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act are generally required to pay at least the applicable minimum wage rate required under Executive Order 14026 or Executive Order 13658. Please note that these Executive Orders apply to covered contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself,but do not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). 1If the contract is entered 1. Executive Order 14026 linto on or after January 30, 1 generally applies to the 12022, or the contract is I contract. renewed or extended (e.g., an 1. The contractor must pay loption is exercised) on or I all covered workers at lafter January 30, 2022: 1 least $17.20 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2024. 1If the contract was awarded onl. Executive Order 13658 for between January 1, 2015 andl generally applies to the JJanuary 29, 2022, and the I contract. contract is not renewed or 1. The contractor must pay alll extended on or after January I covered workers at least 130, 2022: 1 $12.90 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed) on this wage determination,1 if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on that contract in 2024. 1 1 1 The applicable Executive Order minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. If this contract is covered by one of the Executive Orders and a classification considered necessary for file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must still submit a conformance request. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the Executive Orders is available at http://www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2024 BOIL0074-003 07/01/2023 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 37.00 24.64 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/27/2023 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 29.50 8.94 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1) Tower Crane.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) Cranes with Pile Driving or Caisson Attachment and Hydraulic Crane 60 tons and above.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) Hydraulic cranes 59 Tons and under..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0084-011 06/01/2023 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 27.51 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR- MECHANICAL file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] (Duct, Pipe & Mechanical System Insulation)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: Common or General......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Brick...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender- Cement/Concrete..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: Roof Tearof£..........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: Drill.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic..............$ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 PAINTER(Brush, Roller, and Spray)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER(HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] HVAC Duct Installation...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ------------------------------------------------------ ** Workers in this classification may be entitled to a higher minimum wage under Executive Order 14026 ($17.20) or 13658 ($12.90). Please see the Note at the top of the wage determination for more information. Please also note that the minimum wage requirements of Executive Order 14026 are not currently being enforced as to any contract or subcontract to which the states of Texas, Louisiana, or Mississippi, including their agencies, are a party. Note: Executive Order(EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded(and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at https://www.dol.gov/agencies/whd/govemment-contracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iii)). file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate)ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour National Office because National Office has responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information(wage payment data,project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ------------------------------------------------------ END OF GENERAL DECISION" file:///S/...UP/26175/C303/Specs/Front%20End/eng-00-73-0.2%20-%20tx288%20BUILDING%20(Aransas,°/o20Nueces,%20SanPatricio).txt[5/10/2024 2:54:04 PM] ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Urban Engineering, LLC 361-854-3101 Mark Maroney, P. E. 361-854-3101 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 Water/Wastewater/Stormwater 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 01 33 01 REFER TO SUBMITTAL REGISTER SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: Specification Section Record Data Description 00 72 00—Art. 26 RECORD DRAWING FOR ENTIRE PROJECT SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 3/2023 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. This project consists of the removal of existing pump, pump base, pump guide rails and electrical control panel and the installation of new concrete base, discharge pipe fitting and buried and exposed electrical conduit. This project also consists of the installation of City provided submersible pump, pump base,guide rails, misc. pump accessories and control panel and miscellaneous items of work required to complete project in accordance with plans, specifications and Contract Documents. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. NONE B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. Summary of Work 01 11 00- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 10/2018 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 10/2018 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances' have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance C1—Utility Unforeseen Allocation: 1. The AL bid item described as"Allowance for Unanticipated Work" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allowance may be used at the OAR's discretion should an unanticipated adjustment of a utility, unknown structure or similar situation warrant the use of the allowance funds. Sound the use of funds from the "Allowance for Unanticipated Work" become necessary, the OAR will Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 5/2020 provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the Contractor. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 20422 Rev 5/2020 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A-2—Bonds and Insurance (Maximum Allowance of 2%) 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically forthis Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. C. Bid Item B-1 — Effluent Pump Replacement (All work for the improvement include in the Contract Document that are not specifically described in another Bid Item) 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the lump sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide the Effluent Pump Replacement, including installation of city provided pump, accessories and control panel. This item shall include all work required to complete the work that is not measured under another bid item, complete in place, as outlined in the plans and contract documents. Contractor shall provide a detailed breakdown of this item after contract award to use for monthly payment requests. D. Bid Item B-2—Electrical Improvements 1. Lump Sum 2. This item shall be measured for payment by the Lump Sum and shall include but is not limited to all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide the electrical portion of the project per plans and specifications and obtain electrical permit from City. E. Bid Item C-1—Utility Unforeseen Allocation 1. Allowance 2. The Allowance bid item described as"Unanticipated Utility Improvements" has been set as noted and shall be included in the Total Base Bid for each Bidder. This allocation may be used at the OAR's discretion should an unanticipated adjustment of a utility, unknown structure or similar situation warrant the use of the allocation funds. Should the use of funds from the"Unanticipated Utility Improvements" become necessary,the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between the City and the Contractor. Payment shall be negotiated for each circumstance. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used throughout the course of the work. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 20422 Rev 5/2020 F. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or SECTION 00 30 01 BID FORM. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 20422 Rev 5/2020 0133 01 Submittal Register Specification Paragraph Types of Submittals Required Section Specification Description No. Product Sample or Operations Information Mockup Data 02 62 06 Sductile Iron Pipe and Fittings DIV 3 Concrete 9K Painting DIV 26 Electrical Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements-Project No.24022 10/2018 013500 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times and in the sequence suggested in Technical Specifications 13C. B. Work shall be completed within the specified time for these items: Description Time Substantial Completion of Entire Project 180 Calendar Days Final Completion of Entire Project 210 Calendar Days Note that the Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump Station provides a critical service for the City of Corpus Christi, TX. Work shall be performed in a manner that will not prevent the pump station from delivering treated effluent to the Gabe Lazano Golf Course. It is critical that the Contractor coordinates with the Wastewater Dept.staff, design engineer and the OAR throughout construction to maintain the effluent pumping operations as much as possible. The effluent pump shall only be out of service for no more than five consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall provide the City and OAR a request for effluent pump shutdown at least two weeks prior to taking the unit out of service to complete the improvements. The City reserves the right to grant, delay, or deny such shutdown depending upon the anticipated weather conditions or other issues that would affect the impact on effluent status at the golf course. In addition, the Contractor's overall construction schedule shall clearly highlight the anticipated scheduled shutdown and duration. C. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. D. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the Contract Times. 1.02 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. Special Procedures 01 35 00- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 10/2018 B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times.These have been identified above and in Technical Specifications 13C. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. Coordinate with the Owner for the operation of any pump or valve,they shall not be opened or closed without a City operator being present. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities and handle any leakage past closed valves, gates or adjacent structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS(NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 10/2018 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including ODT's field- effi^^ and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE maintaining the fellewing 1. Heating: Mini.-,-,um 75 d gees ID temp at 10 deg.ees -,m bie + 2. Ceelirg• Mind n m 75 degFees II)tern ,at 109 degrees ambi r+ 3. Relative humidity: 44 to 54 perGePA B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES- FIELD OFFICE NOT REQUIRED r--entain -;;t least 120 square feet A-f useable spare. The field- effirGe must -he air-r--end-itiened- and- heated- and- IrAyst be furn*Shed- %voth aA ffiprelinedd table that PAPeasures; at Ileast 30- inr.hes by—o0 inches;and tv/e c�uirs. The Ge=rtraEtBr sh�'crt;--rr eve—the field--oT,TEe An the Site ars required by the ^—A°. The. sepai ate pay item feithe field A- e. R_ �-UrR66h a field- effirce ef adequate si;_�e fer GeRtrarcter's use. Pre-vide eepfereRee Fe9PA Space OPT t • ram; 08 Rd leeatien. agrec�rcv +. �-c�3r'c", " , " 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements-Project No. 24044 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS—N/A A. Thp Owner will fi-mi h twe PFejeet signs te be installed by the GentrarAeF. The signs must peFied by the GentFaEteF. The leEatiens ef the signs will be detem9ined in the field by the GAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 8/2019 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE gates with padleel(s. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. ffi, equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24044 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. D;sehaFge Eliminatien -System (TPDES) GeneFal PeFFnite. TXQJ-59nnn ., t ,T � f--�.�ster;,,�a-eF ;;w.; ;;Ad Regulations. Pale FequiFed legal netiees -and- .-eqUiFed peFnq*ts PFieF te beginning any eenStFUetien aetivity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. rrvv-iue a—S-vvT-ramthat E6FR-pncs=with eqUFFeng^ �eRefea-rreFfflFt�Er TXR150000 and any etheF applieable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 01 57 00- 1 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements-Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 01 57 00-2 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 01 57 00-3 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 01 57 00-4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi,Texas. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for Temporary Controls 01 57 00-5 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Contractor shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 01 57 00-6 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pumping Improvements—Project No. 24022 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 025620 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern for the construction of Portland cement concrete pavement on a prepared subgrade or base course, in accordance with the typical sections shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates (fine and coarse), admixtures if desired or required, and water,proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided. All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. 2. MATERIALS (1) Cement The cement shall be either Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM Designation: C150, modified as follows: Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, the specific surface area of Type I and 11 cements shall not exceed 2000 square centimeters per gram(Wagner Turbidimeter— TxDOT Test Method Tex-310-D). The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement as to the specific surface area of the cement, expressed in square centimeters per gram, for each shipment. For concrete pavements, strength requirements shall be demonstrated using flexural (beam) or compressive(cylinder)tests as required in the drawings. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the plans. Except when Type II is specified on the plans, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours will not exceed 60°F. Type III cement shall be used when high early strength concrete pavement is specified on the drawings. Different types of cement may be used in the same project, but all cement used in any one monolithic placement of concrete pavement shall be of the same type and brand. Only one brand of each type of cement will be permitted in any one project unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. All other cement shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. Similar information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of packaged or bulk cement. Bags shall contain 94 pounds net. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. All cement shall be properly protected against dampness. No caked cement will be accepted. 025620 Page 1 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. (2) Mixing Water Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (3) Coarse Aggre ante Coarse aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 2. (4) Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate for use in concrete mixture shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete", Grade No. 1. (5) Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material. (6) Mortar(Grout) Mortar for repair of concrete pavements shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand, and enough water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall be added to produce the color required. When required by the Engineer, latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. (7) Admixtures Calcium chloride will not be permitted. Unless otherwise noted, air-entraining, retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used in all concrete and shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". (8) Reinforcing Steel Unless otherwise designated on the plans, all steel reinforcement shall be deformed bars, and shall conform to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall be open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 032020 "Reinforcing Steel". Dowels shall be plain billet steel smooth bars conforming to ASTM Designation: A615, Grade 60, and shall have hot-dip galvanized finish. 3. STORAGE OF MATERIALS All cement and aggregate shall be stored and handled in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 025620 Page 2 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 4. MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measurement of the materials, except water, used in batches of concrete, shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 5. CLASSIFICATION AND MIX DESIGN It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design to comply with the requirements herein and in accordance with THD Bulletin C-11. The Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to substantiate the design, except the testing of strength specimens, which will be done by the Engineer. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the plans. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility, the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Engineer; however, this will not relieve the Contractor of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. Trial batches will be made and tested using all of the proposed ingredients prior to placing the concrete, and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture is changed. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. When transit mix concrete is to be used, the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. Batch size shall not be less than 50 percent of the rated mixing capacity of the truck. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. This specification section incorporates the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 6. CONSISTENCY In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water, the Contractor may use, or the Engineer may require, an approved water-reducing or retarding agent, or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates or aggregates with different characteristics, which will produce the required results. Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. The concrete shall be 025620 Page 3of5 Rev.3-25-2015 workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. Slump requirements shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 Slump Requirements Construction Method Desired Slump Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Concrete Pavement(slipformed) 1.5 inches 1 inch 3 inches Concrete Pavement(formed) 4 inches 2.5 inches 6.5 inches NOTE: No concrete will be permitted with slump in excess of the maximum shown. 7. QUALITY OF CONCRETE The concrete shall be uniform and workable. The cement content, maximum allowable water- cement ratio, desired slump, minimum slump, maximum slump, and the strength requirements of the class of concrete for concrete pavement shall conform to the requirements of Table 1 and Table 2 and as required herein. During the process of the work, the Engineer will cast test beams or cylinders as a check on the flexural or compressive strength of the concrete actually placed. Testing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". If the required flexural or compressive strength is not secured with the cement specified in Table 2, changes in the batch design will be made. The concrete shall meet either the minimum flexural (beam) strength (7-day or 28-day) or minimum compressive strength(7-day or 28-day) shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 Class of Concrete for Concrete Pavement Class Minimum Minimum Maximum of Flexural(Beam) Compressive Water-Cement Coarse Concrete Stren h Stren h Ratio A arg egate P* 450 psi(7 days) 3200 psi (7 days) 5.6 gal./sack No. 2(1%') 570 psi(28 days) 4000 psi (28 days) 0.50 * 5% entrained air 8. MIXING CONDITIONS The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the limits outlined in City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures", Article "Placing Concrete-General", shall not be used. Re-tamping of concrete will not be permitted. 025620 Page 4 of 5 Rev.3-25-2015 Mixing conditions shall conform to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 9. MIXING AND MIXING EQUIPMENT Mixing and mixing equipment shall confonn to the requirements of City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 10. READY-MIX PLANTS The requirements for ready-mix plants shall be as specified in City Standard Specification Section 030020 "Portland Cement Concrete". 11. PLACING, CURING AND FINISHING All subsurface utilities must be inspected, tested, and accepted prior to any paving. Subgrade preparation shall be as specified on the plans. The placing of concrete, including construction of forms and falsework, curing and finishing shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures". For membrane curing, curing material shall conform to Type 2, Class A curing compound, or as otherwise shown on the drawings. 12. JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT The placing of joints in concrete pavement shall be in accordance with City Standard Specification Section 038000 "Concrete Structures" and as detailed on the drawings. 13. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, the quantities of concrete for concrete pavement(s), which will constitute the completed and accepted pavement(s) in-place, will be measured by the square yard or square foot for the indicated thickness and type of cement. Payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, hauling, mixing, placing, curing and finishing all concrete; all grouting and pointing; furnishing and placing reinforcing steel and steel dowels as shown on the plans; furnishing and placing drains; furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing expansion joint material, joint filler and sealants, and contraction (control) joints required by this specification or shown on the plans; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Any paving placed prior to inspection, testing, and acceptance of underground utilities may be rejected by the City and will be replaced at the Contractor's expense after correcting any subsurface utility defects. 025620 Page 5of5 Rev.3-25-2015 SECTION 026206 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. DESCRIPTION This specification shall govern all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the project. 2. GENERAL All ductile iron pipe shall conform to AWWA C151. The interior of pipe and fittings (excluding fittings for wastewater force mains)shall have a shop-applied cement-mortar lining(40 mils thick)in accordance with AWWA C104. The exterior of pipe and fittings shall have a coating of coal tar enamel of approximately 1 mil thick or as specified in AWWA C105. Ductile iron pipe shall be wrapped in two plys of 8-mil polyethylene in accordance with Section 026402 "Waterlines" of the City Standard Specifications. 3. FITTINGS All fittings shall be ductile iron and in accordance with AWWA C153. Fittings shall have a pressure rating of 250 psi for sizes through 12" and 150 psi for 14" and larger sizes,unless shown differently on the drawings. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, Mechanical Joints shall be used. 4. JOINTS Joints for pipe shall be mechanical type or push-on type such as "Tyton Joint", or approved equal; joints for fittings shall be mechanical joints, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C153. Mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material, Cor-ten nuts, Cor-ten bolts, glands and gaskets. When restrained joints are indicated on the drawings, restrained joints for pipe and fittings of 12" diameter and less shall be mechanical joint with retainer gland Series I100 by EBAA Iron or approved equal,with a minimum of 250 psi rated working pressure. Restrained joints for pipe and fittings over 12"in diameter shall be push on type with a retainer ring as LOK-RING or FLEX-RING by American Ductile Iron Pipe, or TR FLEX by U.S. Pipe, or approved equal. Gaskets shall be of synthetic rubber. An analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present shall be supplied. 026206 Page 1 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 5. PIPE Pressure class ductile iron pipe requirements: Pressure Wall Range of Maximum Diameter Class Thickness Allowable Depth Cover (inches) (psi) (inches) (feet) - (feet) A - B* 4# 350 0.25 60+ 6 350 0.25 30 - 65 8 350 0.25 20 - 50 10# 350 0.26 15 - 45 12 350 0.28 15 - 44 14# 300 0.30 13 - 42 16 300 0.32 13 - 39 18 300 0.34 13 - 36 20 300 0.36 13 - 35 24 250 0.37 11 - 29 24+ x x x * Range of maximum allowable depth of pipe where: A = Ground water, or unstable bottom, or quick condition. B = Ideal trench conditions, and sand encasement is at an average density in excess of 90% Standard Proctor density. # Pipe sizes not typically specified on City projects, but shown for reference. x Requires special evaluation. The face of bells shall be plainly marked by color coding for classes so as to be readily identified in the field. 6. CERTIFICATIONS A certification shall accompany each order of pipe and fittings furnished to job site. Certification shall include the following items: indicate that pipe complies with Part 3 of this specification; indicate that fittings and joints comply with Part 4 of this specification (it should be noted that the supplier shall furnish sufficient technical material for the Engineer to determine whether or not push- on joints can comply with the "or equal" clause); and a copy of a laboratory analysis of the material used in each size gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. 026206 Page 2 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Unless otherwise specified on the Bid Form, ductile iron pipe shall be measured by the linear foot along the centerline for each size of pipe installed. Measurement of pipe shall be up to, but not include, the fittings. Ductile iron fittings shall be measured per each by the type and size, as indicated in the Bid Form. Payment shall include all labor, materials, tools and equipment for the completed installation and testing of the waterline,together with all incidentals necessary to install the pipe and fittings complete in place. 026206 Page 3 of 3 Rev.10-30-2014 TECHNICAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS These Technical Special Provisions amend or supplement the Technical Specifications and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. ARTICLE TS-1 DEFINITIONS Design Specification - Whenever the term "Design Specification" is used, it shall be understood that the performance of the completed work is as designed by the ENGINEER, and the CONTRACTOR must follow the requirements of the drawings and specifications; followed the manufacturer's recommendations (material and equipment);followed industry standard procedures and provided top quality workmanship. Performance Specification - Whenever the tern "Performance Specification" is used, it shall be understood that the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, provided the OWNER has faithfully followed all written operational and maintenance instructions supplied by the CONTRACTOR. (The CONTRACTOR is not relieved of the responsibility for improper performance of the completed work even if there was improper operation and/or maintenance by the OWNER but it obviously was not the cause of improper performance.) In a perfonnance specification,the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the design of the item furnished and installed by him. It is intended that the item function properly without excessive operation and maintenance being required by the OWNER. The item furnished must incorporate the features specified but still perform as intended. The materials specified are to set a minimum standard but shall not be considered a design. If the design furnished by the CONTRACTOR requires higher quality material in order to perform as intended,it shall be furnished at no increase in cost to the Contract amount. When minimum dimensions are specified, they shall not be considered a design. If the design furnished by the CONTRACTOR requires larger dimensions in order to perform as intended,it shall be furnished at no increase in cost to the Contract amount. ARTICLE TS-2 LAYOUT OF THE WORK The Contractor shall layout the work from the existing facilities. If, for whatever reason, it is necessary to deviate from proposed line and grade to properly execute the work, the Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer prior to deviation. If, in the opinion of the Engineer,the required deviation would necessitate a revision to the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide supporting measurements as required by the Engineer. Technical Special Provisions Page 1 of 1 DIVISION 2- SITE WORK SECTION 2A- CLEARING OF SITE 2A2[i] DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS 2A2.1 SCOPE: The drawings show the locations of all known surface and subsurface structures. In the case of underground obstructions such as existing water, sewer, storm sewer, gas or electrical lines that are not shown on the drawings,their location is not guaranteed. The Owner assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all these structures on the drawings or to show them in their exact location. Failure to show will not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work in any manner whatsoever unless the obstruction encountered necessitates substantial changes in the lines or grades or requires the building of special work for which no provision is made in the drawings and which is not essentially subsidiary to some item of work for which provision is made. It is assumed, that as elsewhere provided, the Contractor has thoroughly inspected the site, is informed as to the correct location of surface structures, and has included the cost of such incidental work in the price bid, and has considered and allowed for all foreseeable incidental work due to variable sub-surface conditions, whether such conditions and such work are fully and properly described on the drawings or not. Minor changes and variations of the work specified and shown on the drawings shall be expected by the Contractor and allowed for as incidental to the satisfactory completion of a whole and functioning work or improvement. 2A2.2 ABANDONED LINES: When a line is uncovered that is not necessary for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be cut and plugged with concrete. Owner's representative shall be notified prior to authorizing the cutting and plugging. No claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered for this. 2A2.3 SERVICE LINES When an unshown line is uncovered that must remain in service for the proper operation of the plant, the line shall be rerouted. In this instance, consideration of a claim for additional compensation for extra work will be handled on an individual basis. 2A2.4 TRENCHING AHEAD: 2A2.4.1 General: The Contractor is required to conduct trenching operations in a manner which will allow conflicts to be anticipated thereby allowing measures to be taken in certain cases to circumvent the conflict. Specifically the Contractor shall do the following: a. Trenching shall be performed a minimum of 100 feet(or the total length of the trench)ahead of pipe laying operations. Pilot Trenches may be used at the Contractor's option. b. If unshown buried lines are discovered which may cause conflict, Contractor shall stop pipe laying operations and notify Engineer of discovery. 2A2.4.2 Grade Alignment: If conflict can be avoided by adjusting grades by a maximum of two feet up or down and no additional fittings are required, no claim for additional compensation for extra work will be considered. Lines requiring adjustments greater than 2 feet, additional fittings or the soil being trenched significantly different will be considered for extra compensation on an individual basis. 2A2.4.3 Avoidable Conflicts: Conflicts occurring because of the Contractor's failure to comply with 2A2.4.1 and which could have been avoided by grade adjustment in accordance with 2A2.4.2 will not be considered for extra compensation. 2A2.5 EXTRA WORK No work for which extra compensation is to be received shall be performed until approved by the Engineer and the Owner. 2A2 Deviations Occasioned by Exist. Obstructions Page I of 1 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE SECTION 3A- CONCRETE FORM WORK 3AI[i] SCOPE 3AL1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for designing, providing and installing concrete fonns for any concrete structure (including curb and gutter,inlets, sidewalk and driveways)required to complete the project. With the exception of slabs, flatwork, and curb and gutter, concrete form work systems shall be designed for a minimum rate of concrete placement in the forms of ten (10) vertical feet per hour. This specification is a performance specification as defined in, Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 3A2 MATERIAL 3A2.1 WOOD FORMS: Form lumber shall be seasoned, of good quality, free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay or other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. Lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two edges. All exposed concrete edges shall be chamfered. Molding used for chamfer strips shall be of redwood, cypress or pine of quality that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to true lines. Chamfer strips to predetermined elevations just prior to placing final lift. 3A2.2 STEEL FORMS: Metal forms shall provide a smooth straight surface and shall line up properly. Rivets and bolt heads in contact with concrete will be countersunk,level with surrounding surface. Metal surfaces in contact with concrete will be free from rust, paint or other foreign material that will disfigure or discolor concrete. Mount chamfer strip by Engineer approved methods and maintain as to grade and alignment_ 3A2.3 FORM LINING: Surfaces to be given a rubbed finish are to have form surfaces or form lining surfaces free of irregularities. Lining is to be of plywood made with waterproof adhesive, of 1/4 inch minimum thickness, preferably oiled at the mill and then re-oiled or lacquered on the job before using. An alternate to the plywood lining is tempered Masonite concrete form presswood having a minimum 3/16 inch thickness. Keep presswood moist at least 12 hours before applying to sheathing. Use smooth hard face as concrete contact surface. Facing may be constructed of 3/4 inch plywood made with waterproof adhesive, backed by adequate studs and wales; and, in this case, form lining will not be required. Carefully align edges and faces of adjacent panels. 3A2.4 FORM TIES: Form ties shall be threaded rod or coil tie type designed and of such length to provide a cone shaped formed "setback" of 3/4" on each wall face. Wire type form ties with breakback and cone may also be used (such as Symons S-Panel with washer). After removal of forms, the cone shaped void shall be grouted. All form ties shall incorporate a waterstop manufactured as an integral feature of the tie. Form ties shall be part of the form system design and shall be adequate for all aspects of said system including a minimum rate of concrete placement in the forms of ten(10)vertical feet per hour. The use of"snap ties" or similar products will not be permitted, except that Engineer will consider Contractor proposals to utilize such products on a case by case basis. Temporary form spreaders will be removed as concrete is placed. Engineer will consider details of permanent form spreaders that Contractor may propose to use. A. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set, 6 inches thick and void form cover sheets. 3A Concrete Form Work Pagel of 2 3A3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3A3.1 FALSEWORK: Falsework shall be of rigid construction to prevent excessive settlement or deformation under imposed loading and to insure the safety of the workmen and the structure. Only sound timber shall be used for falsework. Falsework shall be designed using 150 pounds per square foot of horizontal surface of form. 3A3.2 FORMS-GENERAL: Forms are to be constructed and placed in such a manner as to insure mortar tightness, rigidity to prevent excessive settlement or deformation under imposed loading and to insure the safety of the workmen and the structure. Forms shall be constructed in such a manner as to allow cleanout before placing of concrete; adequate access by tremies and vibrators; and removal without damage to concrete. Adequate cleanout openings shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. If excessive settlement or deformation occur, remove the concrete and steel,reset forms,replace the steel and pour fresh concrete. If existing steel is to be reused, Section 3B2.6 must be met. 3A3.3 FORMS-CURB AND GUTTER, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS: Form shall be straight durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth; they shall be securely staked to line and grade in such manner that there will be no movement when the concrete is placed. 3A3.4 FORMS-DESIGN: Forms shall be designed for a fluid pressure of 150 pounds per cubic foot and a live load of 50 pounds per square foot on horizontal surfaces with maximum unit stress of 125%of allowable stresses. 3A3.5 OILING FORMS: All surfaces of forms that will be in contact with concrete will be treated with an approved form oil before concrete is placed. The Contractor shall apply form oil in such a manner so as to insure that no excess oil accumulates on the reinforcing or previously placed concrete. Immediately prior to placing concrete,the Contractor shall wet forms which will come in contact with concrete. 3A3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS FROM SURFACES TO BE RUBBED: Forms shall be removed when concrete has attained adequate strength to prevent damage and only as rapidly as rubbing operation progresses. Forms left in place longer than 24 hours will be rewet to keep moist. 3A3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND FALSEWORK FROM SURFACES NOT TO BE RUBBED: Forms and falsework shall be removed after concrete has aged the following number of curing days. a. Slabs,Beams,or Girders- 7 curing days. b. Walls, Columns and Piers-2 curing days. 3A3.8 SETTING FORMS OR FALSEWORK ON SUBSTRUCTURES: Forms or falsework shall not be erected on a concrete structure until the concrete in the substructure has cured at least four curing days. 3A3.9 SETTING FORMS OR FALSEWORK ON FOOTINGS: Forms or falsework shall not be erected on a concrete footing until the concrete in the footing has cured at least 3 curing days. 3A3.10 CURING DAY: A curing day is any calendar day on which the temperature near the stricture is above 50°F for at least 19 hours. 3A Concrete Form Work Page 2 of 2 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE SECTION 3B- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 3BI[i] SCOPE 3B1.1 SCOPE: This specifications shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing reinforcing steel, bar supports, welding, tools, supplies, equipment and services, and placing of concrete reinforcement of the shape and dimensions shown on the contract drawings, and as called for by these specifications required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in, Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 3112 MATERIAL 3B2.1 REINFORCING STEEL: All reinforcing bars shall be deformed as defined in ASTM Specifications. All reinforcing bars,unless noted on the structural drawings, shall be Grade 60 as defined by the American Society for Testing and Materials "Specifications for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (A615, A616 or A617). Spiral reinforcing steel shall be fabricated from cold drawn wire with (ASTM A82) or hot rolled plain or deformed bars conforming to ASTM A625, Grade 60. Welded smooth wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185 "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 12 inches maximum). Welded deformed wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A497 "Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement" (ACI 318-71 limits the wire spacing to 16 inches max.). 3B2.2 TIE WIRE: The tie wire used shall be black annealed wire, 16 gauge or heavier. 3B2.3 REINFORCING BAR SUPPORTS: Bar supports shall conform to the 'Bar Supports Specifications" contained in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. The Contractor shall provide such accessories as plastic spacers, plastic bar supports (chairs), and other approved devices necessary for proper assembly, spacing and supporting the reinforcing steel. Chairs with feet that will be exposed shall be rubber encapsulated. 3B2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES: All accessories for reinforcement spacing and support shall be the size and type to accurately conform to the required spacing and concrete clear cover as shown on Construction Drawings. 3B2.5 MILL CERTIFICATES: Two certified copies of mill tests on each grade of reinforcing steel delivered showing physical and chemical analysis shall be provided,upon request,at the time of shipment. 3B2.6 SURFACE CONDITION: Metal reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free from mud, oil, or other non-metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. Metal reinforcement, except prestressing steel, with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both shall be considered as satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions, including height of deformations and weight of a hand wire brushed test specimen, are not less than the applicable ASTM specification requirements. 3B2.7 REINFORCING STEEL OF FOREIGN MANUFACTURER: No reinforcing steel of foreign manufacture shall be allowed on the project site. Any foreign steel accidentally delivered to the project site must be removed immediately. 3B Concrete Reinforcement Page 1 of 2 3113 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3B3.1 STORAGE: The Contractor shall store all reinforcement above the surface of the ground on platforms, skids or other suitable supports. 3B3.2 PROTECTION: The Contractor shall protect all reinforcement from mechanical injury, from surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust, and from non-metallic coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. 3B3.3 STANDARD PRACTICE: All requirements of concrete reinforcement not covered in these specifications or on the structural drawings shall be in accordance with "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All hooks shall conform to bend dimensions defined as "ACI Standard Hooks" in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, unless otherwise shown on the structural drawings. All reinforcing bars shall be bent cold. Reinforcing bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Reinforcing bars shall conform accurately to the dimensions shown on the structural drawings and within the fabricating tolerances shown in "Manual of Standard Practice", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and the Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 3B3.4 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL: The placement of bars should conform to the recommended practices in "Placing Reinforcing Bars", as published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Bars should be securely tied to prevent displacement during the concreting operation and all dowels must be wired in place before depositing concrete. All splicing of bars, concrete cover, placing tolerances and bar spacing shall conform to "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" (ACI 318), as published by the American Concrete Institute, and to recommended practices in 'Reinforcing Bar Splices" by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. All reinforcing steel splices shall be Class B—ACI 318-98, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 3B3.5 SHOP DRAWINGS: The Contractor shall furnish 6 copies of the placing drawings and bar lists in accordance with the latest revision of"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" (ACI 315), as published by the American Concrete Institute. Reinforcing steel shall not be fabricated until shop drawings have been approved by the Engineer. 3B Concrete Reinforcement Page 2 of 2 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE SECTION 3C- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3C4[i] CONCRETE STRUCTURES 3C4.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to construct all structures required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 3C4.2 MATERIAL: 3C4.2.1 Concrete: Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days (unless specifically specified otherwise)and shall be in accordance with Section 3C1 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". 3C4.2.2 Reinforcing Steel: See Section 3B "Concrete Reinforcement". 3C4.2.3 Premolded Expansion Joint Filler: Premolded expansion joint filler shall conform to ASTM Specification D-544,Type I. 3C4.2.4 Non-Shrinkage Grout: Shall be "Embeco 636" or"Masterflow 713" as manufactured by Master Builders Company, or "Ferrolith G" as manufactured by Sonneborn-Contech or approved equal. 3C4.2.5 Waterstops: a. Horizontal Joints (floor to wall): Waterstops for horizontal joints shall be either pre-molded polyvinyl chloride(PVD) or non-swelling pre-formed joint sealant. (1) PVC waterstops shall be "Durajoint" No. 5 as manufactured by Electrovert, Inc., or "Sealtight" No. 6380 as manufactured by W.R.Meadows or approved equivalent. (2) Pre-molded waterstops shall be "Synko-Flex" plastic (Bitumen) continuous waterstop or approved equivalent, unless otherwise designated on plans. The "Synko-Flex" type water stop shall be used only in horizontal construction joints in slabs. Following manu£'s recommended installation,including: 1. Concrete that waterstop is being used on should cure 24 hours prior to priming. 2. Ensure that concrete surfaces are free from form oils, release agents, curing compounds, laitance and other dirt or debris. Use a wire brush or stiff bristle brush to clean surface prior to priming. 3. Apply primer to the cured surface and allow to da, usually 2 to 3 hours, before applying waterstop. 4. Place the waterstop strip onto the primed surface pressing firmly along the entire length of the strip. The strip should be depressed to approximately 5/8 inch in thickness forcing it to widen to approximately 1-1/2 inches. Splice strips together with a 1-inch overlap or side lap. b. Vertical Joints: Waterstops for vertical joints shall only be pre-molded polyvinyl chloride. PVC waterstops shall be "Durajoint" No. 5 as manufactured by Electrovert, Inc., or "Sealtight" No. 6380 as manufactured by W.R.Meadows or approved equivalent. 3C4.2.6 Membrane Curing Compound: Membrane curing compound shall be a resin base compound in accordance with ASTM Specification C- 309,Type 1,with light red tint of fugitive dye. 3C4.2.7 Cotton Mats for Curing: Cotton mats for curing shall be mats which uniformly contain a minimum of 3/4 pound of cotton per square yard,with Osnaburg covering cloth being a weight of not less than 6 ounces per square yard. The mats shall be a size which may be easily handled and having 6 inch wide flap for overlaps. 3C4 Concrete Structures Page 1 of 6 3C4.2.8 Floor Hardener: Where drawings specify a floor hardener, liquid floor hardener shall be "Lapidoloth" as manufactured by Sonneborn-Contech, or "Kemplate" metallic surface hardener as manufactured by Chem-Masters Corp., or an approved equal. 3C4.2.9 Integral Concrete Coloring: Where drawings call for integral concrete coloring, "Sonobrite" as manufactured by Sonneborn-Contech, or"Staybrite" as manufactured by A.C.Horn Company,or an approved equal shall be used. 3C4.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 3C4.3.1. Required Approval: Prior to starting work,the Engineer may require the Contractor to furnish for approval the following: a. Methods of construction. b. Drawings for all form and falsework. C. Amount and type of equipment to be used on the project. d. The concrete placing schedule which take into account concrete shrinkage. e. A schedule showing all surfaces to receive a rubbed finish. The Engineer's approval of the above listed items does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for safety or correctness of methods, adequacy of equipment, or for carrying out work in accordance with his contractual obligations. 3C4.3.2 Time Sequence of Operation: a. All substructure concrete work shall be cured for a minimum of four days before erecting forms or placing structural steel thereon. b. All substructure concrete work shall cure for a minimum of 7 days before pouring superstructure concrete thereon. c. All wall footings shall cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing wall forms thereon. d. All superstructure shall cure for a minimum of 10 days before being used. 3C4.3.3 Expansion Joints: The Contractor shall remove forms as soon as possible to permit free expansion of concrete. Premolded expansion joint fillers shall be anchored to concrete on side of joint by means of copper wire No. 12 B and C gauge or heavier or copper nails of approved size. Concrete sections are to be completely separated by open joint or by joint material. The maximum distance between vertical expansion joints in concrete walls shall be 50 feet, unless shown differently on the plans. 3C4.3.4 Construction Joints: a. General: "Construction Joint" is defined as a contact surface between plastic concrete and concrete that has attained initial set. "Monolithic" means concrete placed without construction joints. Waterstops shall be provided in all construction joints in structures containing liquids up to a point one foot above the maximum water surface elevation and in all construction joints in structures with walls adjacent to soil, below a point one foot above the finished grade. The Contractor shall obtain written authorization of the Engineer to permit construction joints other than those indicated. Where such authorization is obtained, make additional construction joints with details and waterstops equivalent to those shown for similar joints. b. Construction: The Contractor shall leave surfaces rough with aggregate surface prior to placing of new concrete. Immediately prior to placing concrete on horizontal joint surfaces, slush surface with mortar coating. Mortar is to consist of regular concrete mix less coarse aggregate. On vertical surface, mortar is to be brushed on and worked into irregularities on surface. Keyways are to be formed so as to permit easy removal of forms without damaging the concrete. Waterstops are to extend into both old and new pour an equal distance, or according to manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer. 3C4 Concrete Structures Page 2 of 6 3C4.3.5 Concrete Form Work: See Section 3A- "Concrete Form Work". 3C43.6 Placing Reinforcement: See Section 3B- "Concrete Reinforcement". 3C4.3.7 Seal Slabs: Seal slabs shall be placed in all excavations for structures which require reinforcing steel in base slab. Excavate below bottom of structural slab to the thickness shown on the drawings(min.2 inches)and pour seal slab concrete to structural slab bottom elevation. Rough float finish seal slab. No direct payment will be made for seal slab concrete. Seal slab is not required for building on grade slab and grade beams unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 3C4.3.8 Authorization to Place Concrete: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of a scheduled concrete placement. The Contractor shall not begin mixing concrete (or place an order for concrete) until the Engineer has inspected the forms, reinforcing steel, and given his approval. Before concrete is placed, all embedded items shall be accurately and securely fastened in place. The Contractor shall not place any concrete until he has at least three (3) mechanical vibrators, of an approved type, on the project site that are in good operating order. 3C4.3.9 Scheduling of Concrete Placement: The Contractor shall schedule the concrete placement so as to insure completion during the hours of daylight. If it is necessary to continue pouring during hours of darkness, light the site in such a manner as to insure competent and safe operation. The Engineer can order postponement of placing operations when impending weather conditions threaten to impair the quality of the finished work. Should rainfall occur after placing operations have started, provide covering to protect work. If conditions occur which would be detrimental to placement and setting of concrete, such as pile driving or other vibration,stop the cause of such condition when concrete is being placed and until concrete has aged 12 hours. 3C4.3.10 Handling and Transporting Concrete: The Contractor shall use metal or metal lined chutes,troughs, and/or pipes in placing concrete to prevent separation of concrete ingredients. When pouring down steep slopes, chutes shall be equipped with baffles to reverse lateral direction of movement. Downpipe shall be provided at end of chute. A maximum slope of one vertical to two horizontals shall be used. Chutes and troughs shall be kept free from coatings of hardened concrete or other harmful material. Chutes in excess of 35 feet in length may be used by authorization of the Engineer only. Pumping of concrete may be done by authorization of Engineer only. 3C4.3.11 Placing Concrete: Free fall of concrete shall be limited to a maximum of 4 feet. The Contractor shall place concrete in walls and other inaccessible places by use of tremies. Concrete shall be placed as close as possible to its final location. Vibrators shall not be used to work concrete along the forms. Concrete, reinforcing steel or forms shall not be jarred,moved, or otherwise disturbed after concrete has taken initial set. Concrete shall be placed in continuous horizontal lavers approximately 12 inches thick. Each successive layer shall be placed while the layer below is still plastic. If excessive water forms on the surface of the concrete,use concrete to a point approximately 1 foot below finish elevation and allow to settle. To avoid cold joint, resume placement of concrete after partial stiffening. Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened will not be permitted. 3C43.12 Consolidating Concrete: Consolidation of concrete shall be done by means of spading implements and mechanical vibrators of approved type. Use of vibrators of the type which operate by attachment to forms shall be by authorization of the Engineer only. Vibration of concrete shall begin immediately after placement and shall go completely through to next layer below to insure mixture of both layers. Vibration shall not be used for flowing concrete laterally. 3C4 Concrete Strictures Page 3 of 6 3C4.3.13 Placing Concrete on The Ground: The Contractor shall prepare the subgrade in accordance with the applicable earthwork specifications. Apply membrane waterproofing if called for on the drawings and/or specified elsewhere. If membrane waterproofing is not required, moisten subgrade just prior to placing concrete, to decrease absorption of moisture from the concrete. If necessary, pump or bail during placing operations from suitable sump located outside of forms. Pumping will be continued until concrete has attained initial set. Side forms may be omitted when authorized by the Engineer. 3C4.3.14 Placing Concrete in Water: The Contractor shall place concrete in water only by specific authorization of the Engineer. Concrete placed in or under water will contain a minimum of 6-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete. The Contractor shall insure that there is no movement or flow of water in which concrete is being placed for at least 36 hours after placement. Do not disturb concrete after placement and maintain approximately horizontal surfaces at all times. Placement will be by use of watertight tremies of a maximum of 10 inches in diameter. When concrete is placed in tremies,raise tremie slightly,but not out of concrete until batch discharges to bottom of hopper. Stop flow by lowering tremie. Placement will be continuous. 3C4.3.15 Curing Concrete: a. General: The Contractor shall have the option of using curing compound or cotton mats with the exception of the following: Membrane curing compound shall not be used on surfaces to be rubbed,painted or to which waterproofing material or liquid floor hardener is to be applied. Membrane curing compound shall not be used on concrete which will have additional concrete placed on it later. Membrane curing compound shall be used for curing surfaces which cannot be satisfactorily cured with mats. Curing mats shall be kept moist and in contact with concrete for 7 consecutive days. High early strength concrete shall be cured for 3 consecutive curing days. b. Use of Membrane Curing Compound: Membrane curing compound shall be delivered on job site in original containers, labeled to show name of compound, manufacturer, and batch number. Compound shall be kept thoroughly mixed and sprayed on the structure using pressure-tank type spraying equipment. The Contractor shall apply curing compound to the concrete immediately upon removing forms at a rate of one gallon per 200 square feet. Apply compound to slabs or other exposed surfaces immediately after finishing or after excess moisture has disappeared. Membrane shall be kept intact and protected from abrasive action for 14 days to obtain equivalent to 7-day moist curing. Protect against traffic and apply protective coating no sooner than 24 hours after application of membrane. Damage to membrane during 14-day period shall be repaired immediately. 3C4.3.16 Removal of Forms and Falsework: See Section 3A Concrete Form Work. 3C4.3.17 Defective Work: All work which is deemed by the Engineer to be defective will be repaired immediately by the Contractor in accordance with the Engineer's instructions. 3C4.3.18 Monolithic Slab Finish: Unless otherwise specified, slabs, platforms, and steps shall be finished monolithically. Unless otherwise specified, slabs shall be level. The Contractor shall place screeds accurately and rigidly prior to placement of concrete. Concrete shall be tamped to force coarse aggregate away from surface; then float finish and steel trowel to finish building floors. "Dusting" of floor surfaces with dry materials shall not be permitted. Edges of all expansion joints shall be rounded at all expansion joints with suitable jointing or edging tool. 3C4.3.19 Concrete Floor Topping and Finish: Where specified, concrete floor topping shall be applied by the Contractor to structural slabs after equipment has been set. Topping may be placed without Engineer's authorization. Structural slab will be broomed to expose aggregate when concrete is green. Structural slab will be cleaned and kept moist 12 hours prior to placing topping. Immediately before placing concrete topping, broom in slush coat of 3C4 Concrete Structures Page 4 of 6 cement and water mixed to consistency of thick paint. Use 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part sand, and 1- 1/2 parts pea gravel for concrete topping. Use no more than 5 gallons of water per sack of cement. Add 5 pounds of non-shrinking grout aggregate per sack of cement in mix. Steel trowel finish will be provided. If specified, the Contractor shall apply liquid floor hardener in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If specified, the Contractor shall apply integral concrete coloring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3C4.3.20 Filling for Tie and Bolt Holes: The Contractor shall fill holes solid with cement mortar. Add white cement to mortar so that patches will not appear darker than adjacent concrete surface. Mortar shall be placed into holes as dry as possible. Holes passing entirely through concrete shall be filled from inside of structure with pressure gun or other device that will force mortar through to outside face. Strike off excess mortar flush with surface and finish to make hole as inconspicuous as possible. 3C4.3.21 Patching: Slight honey-comb and other minor defects in concrete surfaces shall be patched with cement mortar mixed 1 part cement to 2 parts fine aggregate. The Contractor shall repair by cutting out unsatisfactory material and replacing it with new concrete, securely keyed and bonded to old concrete and finish so as to make joints as inconspicuous as possible. Mixture shall be as stiff and dry as possible. For hydraulic structures,repair areas in which honeycomb occurs to prohibit leakage through concrete,using mortar to which non-shrinking grout aggregate has been added at the rate of 5 pounds per sack of cement. 3C4.3.22 Rub-Finish Surfaces: a. Extent Required: Exposed vertical and battered surfaces shall be rub-finished from 6 inches below surface or from below water level to the top, except for small structures which extend 12 inches or less above finished grade. b. Procedure: The Contractor shall start the rubbing operations immediately after form removal. Do necessary pointing as forms are removed. Remove forms only as rubbing progresses in No. 16 Carborundum Stone or equal. Rub sufficiently to bring to surface paste and to produce smooth dense surface without irregularities. Add no cement to form surface paste. Spread or brush material which has been ground to paste uniformly over surface and allow to take reset. Do not rub chamfered corners in first surface rubbing. First rubbing shall be completed within 36 hours after completion of concrete placement. In preparation for final finish, rub with No. 30 Carborundum Stone or equal. After rubbing, strip surface with brush and allow mortar on surface to take reset; then wash surface with clean water.Leave structure with clean,neat,and uniform appearing finish. 3C4.3.23 Rough Finish: For concrete having no special finish indicated,remove ties, fill holes, and remove fins and rough edges. 3C4.3.24 Waterstops: Waterstop material will be completely embedded in concrete and shall extend an equal distance into both the old and the new concrete. Waterstops shall be continuous. Splices will be made in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved by the Engineer. 3C43.25 Grouting: a. Mixture: The Contractor shall mix grout(proportion by weight)as follows: (1) For Setting New Equipment: Where clearance is 1 inch or less in thickness, the Contractor shall use 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part clean sharp sand, 7/10 part non-shrinking grout aggregate. No more than 5-1/2 gallons water per sack of cement. Where clearance is over 1 inch in thickness, the Contractor shall use 1 part Portland Cement, 1 part clean sharp sand, and 1-1/2 parts 1/4 inch pea gravel, 7/10 part non-shrinking grout aggregate. No more than 6 gallons of water per sack of cement. (2) Other: For general purpose grouting, the Contractor shall use 1 part Portland Cement and 2 parts sand. When space to be grouted is less than 1 inch, and it is impossible to tamp grout, use 1 to 1 mixture. Use stiff mixture for grout to be tamped. To obtain stiff grout mix mortar 3C4 Concrete Structures Page 5 of 6 using amount of water required to thoroughly mix ingredients, then continue mixing without additional water until grout is stiff enough to be compacted by tamping when placed. For grouting blockouts for embedded pipes and similar items,use grout to which 5 pounds of non- shrinking grout aggregate per sack of cement has been added. b. Procedure for Grouting Equipment: The surfaces of foundations that are to receive grout shall be free of all laitance, grease, oil, organic matter and loose particles. Bolt holes shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter. Concrete shall be chipped in order to obtain a firmer bond as directed by the Engineer.Forms for the grout shall be set true, level, and tight, and shall be well braced. All equipment to be grouted shall be assembled at the grouting site before grouting operations begin. Base plates and items to be embedded shall be cleaned and set in their final positions prior to the start of grouting operations. All equipment shall be so shimmed as to facilitate the removal of the shims. Shims shall be removed only after the grout has attained its full strength.The areas to receive grout shall be kept wet for a minimum of 12 hours prior to grouting. Neat cement mortar slush coat shall be applied with a stiff brush, and shall be scrubbed into the concrete foundation and applied to the sides and bottom of the base plate or other item to be set. The mortar shall be thoroughly mixed and an excess of water in the mixture shall be avoided. The grout shall be continuously worked and rodded while it is being placed in the forms. All grout destroyed in the removal of shims shall be replaced with grout of the exact same composition and consistency. All grout containing non-shrinkage grout aggregate shall be cut off vertically below the outside edge of the base plate or the base of the embedded equipment, and normal cement mortar shall be used to cover the edge of the grout. All exposed surfaces of the grout shall be steel troweled. All exposed areas shall be protected against rapid drying out. Ttems embedded in grout shall not be stressed. The machinery embedded in the grout shall not be operated for 36 hours. 3C4 Concrete Structures Page 6 of 6 Greenwood WWTP Effl Pump DIVISION 9-FINISHES SECTION 9K-PAINTING 9K1[2] PAINTING YARD PIPING 9K1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for providing all painting of exposed yard piping required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section in Article TS-1 Technical Special Provisions. 9K1.2 WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be done using "first class workmanship". The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes "first class workmanship" and shall have the right to immediately stop the work covered under this section, if said work is not being done to his satisfaction. The painting operation shall not resume until the methods have been corrected to the Engineer's satisfaction. 9K1.3 PROTECTIVE COATING FOR UNDERGROUND PIPE: See pipe specification. 9K1.4 COLORS: All colors shall be selected by the Engineer and/or Owner. The Contractor shall prepare samples of colors for approval by the Engineer and/or Owner. 9K1.5 SAMPLES: The Contractor shall submit for approval samples of paint materials proposed for use, in three displays of each kind of color of paint to be applied. The Contractor shall make panels used for displays, representative of respective types of surfaces to which several kinds and colors are to be applied in actual work. The Contractor shall not order paint materials until color selections have been made and samples approved. 9K1.6 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: 9K1.6.1 General: Not less than 30 minutes, nor more than 8 hours prior to application of paint, completely clean surfaces to be painted. 9K1.6.2 Metal: a. General: All metal surface to be painted shall be cleaned by abrasive blasting, except items that are shop coated. Cleaning shall be to Near White Metal SP-10 or NACE Q. b. Near White Metal(Abrasive blast cleaning SP-10 or NACE#2.): (1) Definition: Near White Metal is a method of preparing the metal surfaces for the application of protective coatings by removing mill scale, rust, old paint and any foreign matter by propelling blasting media through a nozzle with compressed air. This is defined as a surface, gray white in appearance,being almost a completely uniform metallic color, with ver,Llighht shadows allowed over less than 10%of the surface area. (2) Procedure: (a) Before blasting,grind smooth any rough welds and sharp edges. (b) Remove heavy deposits of oil and grease by detergent cleaning using one pound Sodium Meta Silicate per five gallons of water. (c) The blasting media used shall be 16-35 mesh, or 20-60 sharp angular grained silica blasting media that is fresh water washed, dried, properly graded and delivered to the job site in moisture proof bags (bulk blasting media of equal quality and size is acceptable). Blasting media shall not be re-used. 9K Painting Piping Page 1 of 4 (d) Compressed air shall be delivered at a minimum nozzle pressure of 90 p.s.i., not to exceed 110 p.s.i. This shall be free of detrimental amounts of condensed water and oil. (e) All blast products shall be swept or blown from the surface before priming commences. (f) Blast cleaning will not be conducted on surfaces that may become wet after blasting and before priming is complete,or when surfaces are less than 5°F above dew point,or when relative humidity is above 85%. (g) The blasted surface shall be primed within 8 hours. c. Removal of Oil and Grease: Remove oil and grease with approved solvents such as naphtha, or by steam combined with approved detergent. USE OF GAS/KEROSENE NOT PERMITTED. d. Scraping, Grinding and Chipping: Scrapers or other suitable grinding and chipping tools may be used for removal of existing paint coating prior to repainting, or for cleaning before application of secondary coats only when approved by the Engineer. e. Abrasive blasting: Clean such surfaces by Near White blasting and leave clean,dry and ready to receive prime coat. Remove all dust and blasting media from surfaces before painting. Take care to remove all blasting media and grit around and between joints of connecting members. Schedule operations to avoid settling of dust or grit on freshly painted surfaces and adequately protect machinery or other equipment in vicinity of abrasive blasting work. 9K1.6 STORING AND MIXING OF PAINT: The Contractor shall use convenient location for storing/mixing of paint materials, and keep approved type fire extinguisher available in this area. The Contractor shall protect all areas where paint is stored or painting is done and he shall remove oily rags and waste from buildings at close of each day. 9K1.7 WEATHER AND SITE CONDITIONS: 9K1.7.1 Temperature: Painting shall not be accomplished when either the surface or ambient temperatures are less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit is forecast. Material shall be stored in areas where the extreme cold or heat will not greatly affect viscosity. Coatings apply much better when product temperature is held within 60°F- 90°F range. (77°F is optimum.) 9K1.7.2 Humidity: Painting shall not be accomplished during misty or rainy weather,or on surfaces that have any frost or moisture. Painting shall not be permitted at temperatures less than 5°F above the dew point. 9K1.7.3 Wind and Dust: Painting shall not be accomplished in dusty rooms or on the exterior during excessive wind. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to what constitutes excessive wind. 9K1.8 APPLICATION PROCEDURES: 9K1.8.1 General: Paint shall be applied by skilled workmen. Paint may be applied with brush or spray equipment. Paint shall be applied in even and thorough coats, without runs, sags or other blemishes. Contractor shall properly sand painted surfaces between coats of enamel, paint or shellac when applied to any surface other than masonry. Apply paints in accordance with manufs recommendations. Do not apply finish field painting to machinery, equipment,or piping until operational testing has been completed. 9K1.8.2 DryingTime: ime: Allow thorough drying of each coat before succeeding coats is applied, except when manufacturer recommends otherwise,or as specified. 9K1.8.3 Coverage: Shall be as recommended by manufacturer. 9K1.8.4 Delivery of Paint: Contractor shall deliver paint to the site in original,unbroken, sealed containers, with manufacturer's label attached. 9K Painting Piping Page 2 of 4 Greenwood WWTP Effl Pump 9K1.8.5 Thinners and Solvents: Contractor shall use only those thinners and solvents specified in paint fonnulas of paint being used and mix in proportions as recommended by paint manufacturer. 9K1.8.6 Brush Application: Contractor shall apply paint in uniform thickness consistent with specified coverage and with sufficient cross brushing to insure filling of surface irregularities. He shall exercise particular care in painting around rivet,bolt heads and nuts,in corner,restricted spaces, and irregular concrete surfaces. 9K1.8.7 Spray pplication: Contractor shall apply paint with adjustable air gun equipped with suitable water trap to remove moisture from compressed air, and with paint pot having hand or air driven agitator. Application of paint by suitable airless spray equipment is acceptable. Paint shall be applied with the width of spray not less than 6 inches nor more than 18 inches, and with suitable pressure for particular type of paint being used. Contractor shall make frequent checks to insure correct spreading rate and coating, and apply without sags,runs, or"orange peel' effect. Correct all such imperfections. The Contractor shall take special care to cover edges,corners,and rivet head without bridging over of paint film. 9K1.9 CLEANING: Upon completion of painting operations, the Contractor shall clean off all paint spots, oil and stain from all surfaces and leave entire project in perfect condition as far as painting work is concerned. Remove from premises all containers and debris resulting from painting operations. 9K1.10 SURFACES TO RECEIVE PAINT: Unless specifically specified otherwise, stainless steel, aluminum, bronze, copper, lead, and galvanized surfaces are not to be painted unless noted otherwise in the specifications or on the drawings. All pipe, fittings, valves, couplings, pipe supports, etc., that are installed above ground shall be painted as set out herein. The following is schedule of surfaces to be painted: a. All new pipe and fittings. b. All existing piping that coating is damaged or disturbed during construction. c. Electrical control room structure coating that is damaged or disturbed during construction. d. Electrical control room electrical gear coating that is damaged or disturbed during construction. 9K1.I I PAINTING EXPOSED VALVES,FITTINGS AND PIPES: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal' SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K1.11.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 4 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 37H-77 Chem-Prime-2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min.4 DMT* 9K1.11.2 Intermediate Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbogua.rd 60 Series-Min. 4 DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 4 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Epoxoline-Min.4 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 Epoxy—Min.4 DMT* 9K1.11.3 Top Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carbothane 134HG—Min.2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Pitthane Ultra Gloss Urethane 95-812-Min. 2 DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield-Min.2.5 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Acrolon Ultra Polyurethane—Min 2.5 DMT* *Minimum Dry Mil Thickness 9K Painting Piping Page 3 of 4 9KI.11.4 Color Coding: Piping shall be color coded as shown on the drawings. When coding is not shown on the drawings,the following shall apply: Sludge Line.......................... Brown Chlorine Line......................... Yellow Gas Line............................... Red Sewage Line.......................... Gray Potable Water ...................... Blue Compressed Air Line............. Green Non-Potable Water............... White stenciled"Unsafe Water" Valve Bodies........................ OSHA Orange Pumps And Blowers.............. OSHA Orange Electric Motors..................... OSHA Orange Belt/Shaft Guards.................. OSHA Orange Effluent Reuse...................... Purple 9K4.12 VALVES,FITTINGS AND PIPES SUBMERGED IN WASTEWATER: (Surface Preparation-Abrasive blast"Near White Metal" SP-10,or NACE#2) 9K4.12.1 Prime Coat: a. 1 coat - Carboline Carboguard 60 Series—Min. 2 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amerlock 2/400 High Solids Epoxy-Min. 2 mils DMT*, c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline,2.5 -3 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams Copoxy Primer—2.5—3 DMT* 9K4.12.2 Intermediate Coat: (Shall be applied in not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat - Carboline Bitumastic 300M—Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT* 9K4.12.3 Top Coat: (Shall be applied not less than 4 hours and not more than 15 hours after applying the previous coat.) a. 1 coat -Carboline Bitumastic 300M—Min. 8 mils DMT*,or b. 1 coat - PPG Amercoat 78HB High Build Coal Tar Epoxy—Min. 8 mils DMT* c. 1 coat - Tnemec Series 46 H-413 Tnemec Tar-Min 8 DMT*. d. 1 coat - Sherwin-Williams TarGuard—Min. 8 DMT 9KI.13 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAINT SYSTEMS: 9KI.13.1 Intent: It is the intent of this specification to provide the Contractor with several manufacturers'paint systems on which to base his bid. The manufacturers'list was furnished to the Engineer by each manufacturer with the product designations listed herein and was represented to list materials to be suitable for their intended use and that they were comparable to other systems listed. The Contractor is responsible for verifying with the paint manufacturer before he purchases any material, that the paint system is suitable for use on this project and that application rates, etc., are in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 9K Painting Piping Page 4 of 4 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT SECTION 11B-PUMPS 11B5[i] WET PIT SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS (Wastewater) 11135.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 11135.1.1 Scope: This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing, installing and placing into initial operation the submersible pumps at: a. Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump Station(Existing) 11135.1.2 [NOT USED] 11B5.1.3 General Description: The pumps shall be designed for handling treated effluent water. The equipment shall be designed such that the pump unit can be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on a mating discharge connection permanently installed in the wet pit. The pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service,requiring no bolts,nuts or other fastening to be disconnected.There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet pit for inspection or maintenance of the pump. Pumps, motors and accessories shall be designed for watertight operation with continuous submergence under 65 feet of water with a maximum temperature of 100' F and for continuous operation at full load with the motor totally exposed to atmospheric air 100'F. 11B5.1.4 List of Equipment To Be Furnished Equipment to be furnished under this specification shall include but not be limited to the following: a. One new Flygt NP 3202—273 Impeller b. One pump base for Flygt NP 3202-273 c. Accessories include 316 S.S. guide rails, 316 S.S. intermediate guide rail brackets (if necessary), 316 S.S.upper guide rail brackets,Kellum's grips d. Floats e. Control Panel with MiniCas Control Devices Submersible Pumps And Motors a. Number of Pumps............................................................................ 1 pump b. Discharge Connection Flange Size.................................................. 4" c. Pump Discharge Size....................................................................... 4" d. Minimum Motor Horsepower: The pump shall not overload the motor at any point on the pump curve but in any case it shall be not less than 72 HP. 11B5.1.5 Operating Conditions: a. Flygt Model NP 3202—273 Impellor: (1) Minimum Head Conditions........................ 970 GPM @ 170'T.D.H. (2) Design Head Conditions............................ 682 GPM @ 231' T.D.H. (3) Shut-Off Head............................................ 358 Ft (4) Maximum R.P.M. ...................................... 3550 (5) Motor Full Load Current at 460 Volts....... 550 amps (6) Motor Efficiency(Minimum) .................... Full load 92.5%, 3/4 load 93.0%, 1/2 load 92.5% (7) Motor Power Factor(Minimum)................... Full load 93%, 3/4 load 92%, 1/2 load 88% 11135.1.6 Quality Assurance: a. Qualifications: The pumps shall be furnished by a manufacturer engaged in the production of the specific type of pump for a minimum of 10 years. The manufacturer shall have furnished similar pumps for at least 5 other installations in Texas performing similar duty. Each previous installation shall have performed satisfactorily for at least 5 years and are still in operation. llB5 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 1 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump b. Workmanship And Design: All manufacturer parts and components shall be engineered for long, continuous and uninterrupted service. Provisions shall be made for easy lubrication,adjustment, or replacement of all parts. c. Equipment Uniformity: Where like items are incorporated into equipment systems (i.e. motors, push buttons, etc.) such items must be identical to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts,and service. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be interchangeable. d. Manufacturer's Quality Control: All stages of the manufacturing process shall be carefully inspected at the factor by factory inspectors who shall use whatever means necessary to assure the proper fit of all field connections and compliance with all material and fabrication requirements of the specifications. e. Factory Assembly: (1) Control Panel: The Control Panel shall be factory wired and assembled. Assembly and wiring shall be to the point where the only field interconnections to numbered terminal blocks are required. 11B5.1.7 [NOT USED] 11B5.1.8 Factory Testing: The pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design, size,horsepower and power supply as those being furnished. 11B5.1.9 Manufacturer's Representative: The technical specifications require that for certain equipment and other items, the manufacturer shall include in the cost to the Contractor specified periods of on-site time of a qualified factory field service engineer to provide certain services. Providing these services is an extremely important part of seeing that the item is installed, adjusted and serviced properly. This, in turn, will help insure that the item furnished will function as intended and have a useful,trouble-free service life. 11B5.1.10 Field Service: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory field service engineer for two 4-hour working days at the site to inspect the installation. 11B5.1.11 Start Up And Field Testing: a. Installation Inspection: After the pumps have been completely installed and wired,the Contractor shall remove the pumps to the wet pit top deck and the pump manufacturer shall: (1) Megger stator and power cables (2) Measure and record combined resistance of motor windings and power cable. (3) Check seal lubrication (4) Check for proper rotation (5) Check power supply voltage (6) Measure motor no load current (7) Check level control operation,and sequence During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the City's personnel. b. Initial Operation: After initial inspection,the Contractor shall lower the pumps into place in the wet pit and provide water for an initial operation check. The manufacture's service representative shall supervise the lowering and connection of the pumps to the discharge connection confirming proper guide bar and discharge connection alignment. The service representative shall then perform an initial operation check of each pump,including: (1) Motor current at"Pumps Off'level (2) Motor current at"Lag Pump On"level (3) Power supply voltage with one,two,three,etc.,pumps running (4) Vibration 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 2 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump c. Operating Test: All of the pumps shall be subjected to the following test as proof of design. When directed by the Engineer the following tests shall be performed by the Contractor and supervised by an authorized engineer of the pump manufacturer. (1) Snore Test: "Snore" is defined as the state when the liquid level has been pumped down to a point of exposing the pump inlet causing air and water to alternately enter the impeller. Liquid level shall be maintained to allow"snore".Motor exterior shall be kept dry. No forced or circulated air will be allowed. Test period shall be one hour,as directed by the Engineer. (2) Run Dry: Discharge piping shall be disconnected to allow circulation of water through the pump and back to the wet well. Liquid level shall be maintained at the pump volute top with the motor totally dry. Test period shall be up to 24 hours,as directed by the Engineer. d. Report: On completion of initial inspection and operation checks the pump manufacturer shall furnish the Engineer with a written report of findings and data determined,with regard to the pumps,motors, accessories, level control and electrical protection devices. This report shall bear the stamp of a Registered Professional Engineer employed or retained by the pump manufacturer to indicate engineering review of field test data. A copy of the report shall also be included in the operation and maintenance manuals to be provided. 105.1.12 Submittal Data: a. General: All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and service specified. No equipment or materials may be used in the project that has not been approved by the Engineer. Submittals shall be complete and shall contain data to confirm compliance or exception to all sections of these specifications. Any exceptions must be clearly indicated.Absence of data will be considered as noncompliance and basis for disapproval. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the review of shop drawings,specifications and data. Before manufacture, the Contractor shall furnish for the Engineer's review and approval as the data as required hereinafter. b. Number Of Copies: Submit six(6)copies of all submittal data. c. Quality and Format: Photocopied information must be of high resolution and letter quality. Submittal sheets are to be 8 1/2 x 11 inches so that the title block is clearly visible without unfolding. Drawings are to be similarly folded and inserted in pockets as appropriate. d. General Arrangement Drawings: All mechanical and electrical components specified herein must be included to be considered a complete submittal.Drawings shall be complete with all dimensions,anchor locations and location of any required electrical connections. e. Wiring Diagrams: For each electrical component include wiring diagrams showing integration with other components of the equipment package. All tenninals and wires shall be numbered on the drawings. f. Specifications: Specifications for all mechanical and electrical components. g. Operating Instructions: Complete operating instructions and sequences for all components, electrical and mechanical, shall be included. h. Manufacture's Instructions: Manufacturer's recommended procedures for Project Site storage of equipment, handling and erection. i. Pump Curves: In addition to published catalog curves,the pump manufacturer shall furnish certified pump curves showing the results of testing pumping units of identical design,size,horsepower and power supply as those to be furnished. Pump curves shall include flow,hydraulic HP input KW and wire to water efficiency plotted against T.D.H. Curves shall be drawn to a large scale. Additional data on the 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 3 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump curve shall include the model, serial number, impeller size, motor rated HP,power supply voltage and frequency,customer for whom the tests were conducted,date and place of testing and name of the individual supervising testing. All data must be indicated in U.S.units(gallons,feet, etc.). 11135.1.13 Operation And Maintenance Manuals: Prior to delivery of the equipment and within 45 days following receipt of submittal data the manufacturer shall furnish a PDF of complete and detailed operation and maintenance manual which shall include the following information as a minimum requirement: a. Name, address and phone number of a competent service organization located within 60 miles of the project site who can supply parts and service. If this is not the manufacturer's own service department,then furnish letters confirming that the named organization has been factory authorized to represent the manufacturer of the pumps furnished. b. Complete descriptive literature and drawings of all material furnished. This is to include "as-built" wiring diagrams of all electrical equipment, "as-built" erection drawings providing up-to-date information on the actual construction of the equipment furnished and any field modifications made during installation, startup and testing. c. Installation,operation and maintenance brochures from the original manufacturers of all mechanical components incorporated into the completed installation. d. A complete parts list with a list of recommended spare parts. e. Guide to "trouble shooting". f. All required alignment,adjustment and checking instructions. g. All required operating instructions. h. All required maintenance instructions, including schedules of routine maintenance and lubrication checks. i. Copies of the pump curves submitted as part of the approved submittal data 11B5.1.14 Warranty: a. Guarantee By the Contractor: The equipment in this specification is subject to the guarantee provisions set out in paragraph 6.30 of Subsection 1D1.1 "Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract" and paragraph 6.10 of Subsection 1D1.2"Supplemental General Conditions". b. Guarantee By the Pump Manufacturer: In addition to the general guarantee required elsewhere in these specifications, the pump manufacturer shall furnish the City a written guarantee to warrant the pumps and motors against defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years or 10,000 hours under normal use,operation and service. The pump manufacturer will pay the following share of the cost of all replacement parts and labor from the date of full operation of each pump unit. Pumps repaired under warranty will be returned to the City freight prepaid. Months: 0 - 18 19 -39 40 -60 Hours: 0- 3000 3000-6500 6500- 10,000 Warranty: 100% 50% 25% The warranty shall be in printed form and previously published as the manufacturer's standard warranty for all similar units manufactured. The Contractor shall provide storage and maintenance during construction as instructed by the manufacturer in order to assure full warranty to the City. c. Accelerated Implementation of Date of Guarantee: Under certain circumstances,the date the warranty period begins on this equipment may be before the entire project is completed. See paragraph 6.11 of Subsection 1131.2 "Supplemental General Conditions". 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 4 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump 11B5.2 PRODUCTS/MATERIAL 11B5.2.1 Submersible Pump Construction: a. General: Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35, with smooth surfaces devoid of blowholes and other irregularities. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of A1SI type 304 stainless steel or brass construction. All surfaces,coming into contact with wastewater,other than stainless steel, shall be factory sprayed with alkyd primer and synthetic resin enamel rubber paint finish. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrite or Viton rubber 0-rings. Fittings shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces which will result in controlled compression of rubber 0-rings in two planes and 0-ring contact on four sides without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Rectangular cross- sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical 0-rings, grease or other devices shall be used. Tolerances of all parts shall allow replacement of any part without additional sealing required to insure sealing as described above. b. Volute: Pump volutes shall be single-piece gray cast iron, Class 35, non-concentric design with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as indicated herein. c. Impeller: All impellers shall be gray cast iron,Class 35,dynamically balanced,double shrouded,long trulet with no acute turns and capable of handling solids,fibrous material,heavy sludge and other matter normally found in raw domestic wastewater and settled activated sludge. Mass moment of inertia calculations shall be provided by the manufacturer on request. Impellers for pumps 7.5 HP and larger shall be single or multivane with keyed and Allen head bolt locking fit to the motor shaft. Impellers for 5.0 HP and smaller pumps shall be single vane with conical sleeve interference and Allen head bolt locking fit to the shaft. Minimum impeller openings dimension shall be 4-inch for pumps 20 HP and larger, and 3-inch for 15 HP and smaller. All impellers shall be coated with acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer. d. Wear Rings: Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall be equipped with nitrite rubber coated steel volute wear rings. Pumps larger than 10 HP shall be equipped with nitrite rubber coated steel,or bronze volute wear rings and 304 stainless steel impeller wear rings. Wear rings shall be designed to prevent deterioration of the machined castings and shall be easily replaceable. e. Shaft: Pump shafts shall be single piece extending through the pump and motor. Extension couplings shall not be acceptable. For pump designed such that the shaft is not exposed to pumped liquid shaft material shall be C 1034 carbon steel. If any portion of the shaft is exposed to pumped liquid the entire shaft material shall be 431 stainless steel. Shaft sleeves of dissimilar metals shall not be used. f. Mechanical Seals: Pumps shall be provided with a mechanical seal system consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies operating and in oil chamber between the pump volute and motor chamber for seal lubrication and cooling. The oil shall be a white paraffin based oil meeting the standards of FDA 172.87B. The lower seal shall act,as the primary unit to prevent entry of pumped liquid to the oil chamber.The upper seal shall act as a secondary unit to prevent pumped liquid or oil from entering the motor stator. The seal system shall allow continuous pump operation with the motor exterior totally dry. Each seal unit shall consist of a positive driven rotating ring; a stationary ring and an independent spring to maintain interface contact.The seal assemblies shall not require maintenance or adjustment,shall be easily inspected,shall be separately replaceable,and shall not be dependent on operating pressure differential for proper sealing. Conventional or cartridge type double mechanical seals utilizing a common spring system shall not be acceptable. The lower seal for all pumps shall have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. The upper seal for pumps 7.5 HP and larger shall also have tungsten carbide rotating and stationary rings. For pumps 5 HP and 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 5 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump smaller the upper seal may be furnished with a tungsten carbide stationary ring and a carbon rotating ring.The pump motor shall be designed to allow simple access for seal inspection.Pumps 20 HP and larger shall be equipped with tapped plugs to allow inspection for leakage in the oil housing and motor stator housing without pump disassembly. Separate oil chamber drain plugs shall also be provided. g. Bearings: Pumps shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings with a system B-10 life of 40,000 hours. Upper bearings shall be single row ball or roller. Lower bearings for pumps 60 HP and smaller shall be double row angular contact.Pumps larger than 60 HP shall be equipped with both a double row angular contact and a roller lower bearing. h. Guide Bracket: A sliding guide bracket shall be provided as an integral part of the pump unit and shall be bolted to a machined surface on the volute. Bracket design shall allow raising and lowering the pump without binding of the bracket and guide bars. When lowered into place the guide bracket shall connect to a machined lip on the discharge connection to automatically align pump and discharge connections and support the total pump weight. No adjustments shall be necessary for assuring proper alignment and no supplemental fasteners, clamps, spool pieces, gaskets or devices of any kind other than bolting to the pump volute shall be required. The guide bracket shall be Class 35 cast iron with the same protective coating as the pump. i. Discharge Connection: A discharge connection shall be provided as an integral part of the pump assembly and shall be Class 35 gray cast iron with the same protective coating as the pump. The discharge connection shall be permanently anchored to the wet well floor. An ANSI B 16.1 Class 125 flange shall be provided for connection to discharge piping. Minimum discharge flange diameter shall be as indicated below and on the drawings. The connection inlet shall be tapered and machined to receive,and provide a metal-to-metal seal with the pump volute discharge flange. Sealing shall be accomplished by a simple cantilever utilizing the pump weight.Systems dependent on mechanical wedging to accomplish horizontal force will not be acceptable.0-rings,diaphragms or seat rings of dissimilar metal shall not be required and will not be acceptable as equal to a machined,cast iron,metal fit.Integrally cast bosses shall be provided on the discharge connection to receive,support and permanently align the guide bars. Discharge connection design shall allow total support of the pump,guide bars and discharge piping,and no more than one 90'turn shall be allowed between the connection inlet and discharge. j. Pump Connection to Discharge Piping: Installation of the pump unit to the discharge connection shall be the result of a simple linear downward motion of the pump unit guided by no less than two guide bars. No other motion of the pump unit,such as tilting or rotating shall be required.No portion of the pump unit,including legs or supplemental attachments,shall bear directly on the floor of the wet pit. 11B5.2.2 Submersible Pump Motor And Cable: a. Motor: The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design,housed in an air filled,watertight chamber. Motors 40 Hp and smaller shall be dual voltage suitable for operation with 230 or 460 volt, three-phase power. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180°C (356°F). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is not acceptable. The use of pins,bolts, screws or other fastening devices used to locate or hold the stator and that penetrate the stator housing are not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty while handling pumped media of up to 40°C. The motor shall be capable of withstanding at least 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. Each unit shall be provided with an integral motor cooling system. Pumps 15 Hp and larger shall have a motor cooling jacket encircling the stator housing,providing for dissipation of motor heat 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 6 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump regardless of the type of pump installation. The cooling system shall have one fill port and one drain port integral to the cooling jacket. The cooling system shall provide for continuous pump operation in liquid or ambient temperatures of up to 104°F (40°C). Operational restrictions at temperatures below 104°F are not acceptable. Cooling systems requiring separate source cooling water will not be acceptable. A leakage sensor shall be provided in the bottom of the motor housing to detect the presence of liquid in the stator chamber. When activated,the sensor shall energize a control and status relay in the control panel,which shall shut the pump down and activate the alarm light. The motor service factor (combined effect for voltage, frequency and specific gravity) shall be 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of± 10%. The motor shall be designed for a continuous operation in up to a 40°C ambient and shall be have a NEMA Class B maximum operating temperature rise of 80°C. A motor performance chart shall be provided exhibiting curves for motor torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. The chart shall also include data on motor starting and no-load characteristics. Motor horsepower shall be sufficient so that the pump in non-overloading throughout its entire performance curve,from shut-off to run-out. Thermal switches embedded in the stator windings shall be used to monitor stator temperature. The switches shall be normally closed and set up to open at 125°C. Automatic reclosing shall occur when a stator temperature cools to 95°C. b. Power Cable Entry&Connection: The power cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight seal and shall allow simple, field changing of power cables without affecting pump or motor warranty. The cable entry assembly shall consist of a seal flange designed and machined to provide precise compressions of a single,cylindrical,elastomer grommet flanked by stainless steel washers all having a close tolerance fit against the outside diameter of the cable and the inside diameter of the entry body. The sealing flange shall bolt to a machined surface on the pump and the compression washer shall bear against a machined shoulder in the entry body. Compression by the entry body shall provide a strain relief function separate from the cable sealing function. A separate junction chamber shall be provided inside the pump for connection of power cable to stator leads. The junction chamber shall be sealed by a nonmetallic plate,or terminal board,bolted to a machined surface and utilizing an O-ring to obtain a watertight seal. Penetrations of the sealing plate or terminal board for stator leads shall be separately sealed to prevent moisture or contamination that might enter through the cable,cable entry or during field change of cables from entering the motor stator housing. Pumps 10 HP and larger shall be furnished with threaded, compression type binding posts mounted in a terminal board. Pumps 10 HP and smaller shall have screwed compression type terminal strips. All pumps 40 HP and less shall be capable of field reconnection for operation with 230 or 460 volt three-phase power. c. Power Cable: All pump power cables shall be multi-conductor externally jacketed with oil resistant chloroprene rubber. Internal tinned copper conductors insulation shall be ethylene propylene rubber (DuPont Nordel) and shall be color-coded to identify each power and control lead. Conductor sizing shall comply with NEC requirements and cables for pumps 40 HP and smaller shall be suitably sized for operation with 230 or 460 volt power.Power cables shall comply with NEC requirements for portable power use. The cable shall be specifically designed for submersible pump service and shall be identified as such by external marking as type SUBCAB (Submersible Cable). 11B5.2.3 Accessories And Hardware: a. General: The pump manufacturer shall furnish and be responsible for coordinating proper fit and suitability of, all station hardware and accessories for use with the pumps furnished or for any future requirements or revisions as may be indicated on the Drawings or other section of the Contract Specifications. All items furnished shall be guaranteed suitable for the intended use and shall be 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 7 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump warranted against defective workmanship, materials and excessive corrosion for a period of one year after final acceptance by the City. All fabricated items inside the wet well shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, stainless steel or aluminum as indicated below. In no case shall any steel other than 300 Series stainless be used for any fabricated item installed below the normal operating water level. b. Access Covers: Not Applicable c. Guide Bars: The guide system shall consist of no less than 2 bars. Each bar shall be standard Schedule 40-wall thickness pipe to assure future availability for replacement. Guide bars shall be 2-inch for pumps 20 HP and smaller, and 3-inch for pumps larger than 20 HP unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. The guide system design shall be adequate to withstand thrust and to support the pump for short-term operation with the pump submerged and suspended above the discharge connection (open discharge). Guide bars spanning 20 feet or less between upper and lower supports shall not require intermediate bracing. Guide bar material shall be schedule 40 304 stainless steel. d. Guide Bar Supports and Brackets: Lower guide bar supports shall be male bosses integrally cast as part of the discharge connection to assure permanent and non-adjustable alignment of the pump and guide bars. Upper guide bar support shall be bolted to the access opening concrete or cover frame as required. Intermediate supports,when required,shall be bolted to the station discharge pipe at a point no less than half the distance between the station floor and top deck. The guide bar support system shall allow removal and replacement of guide bars without intermediate supports and the upper section of bars with intermediate supports without need to enter the wet well.All guide bar supports shall utilize male bosses and not sockets which might fill with debris. Upper and intermediate brackets shall be fabricated of 316 stainless steel. In addition to provisions for guide bar support, upper brackets shall be furnished with welded hooks for hanging the pump lifting device and power cable support. e. Float Cable Raek-sr--. Level sensof floats shall be suspended in the wet well ffom a eable fack bolted to the or- eaver- ffaffie. Raeh F-aek shall be provided with siii, ;/16 iiieh diaffieter-heeks ever whieh the level sensof eables shall be looped. The eable fack shall be 316 stainiess steel. f. Power Cable Supports: A stainless steel or non-metallic cable grip shall be provided for each pump power and pilot cable. The grip shall have a loop on one end,which will hang from a hook provided on the upper guide bar bracket. g. Lifting Assembly: A stainless steel chain shall be provided for each pump. Each chain shall have a minimum working load limit of 50%greater than the pump weight. Chains and attachment hardware intended to be continuously exposed in the wet well shall be 316 stainless steel. h. Hardware: All nuts,bolts,washers,anchor bolts or any attachment hardware used inside the wet well shall be 316 stainless steel. 11B5.2.4 Controls: These specifications require the pump supplier, through the Contractor, to be responsible for proper electrical protection and control operation as may be necessary to preserve the special pump warranty. It is the intent of these specifications that electrical control panels utilized for pump operation be supplied to the Contractor by the pump supplier in order to assure unit responsibility for equipment selection, component compatibility, start-up and operational checks and future service. In addition to operational or functional requirements in this section, all electrical equipment supplied must comply with all requirements of Division 16 Electrical and with the Electrical Drawings. 105.2.5 Control Sequences: a. Effluent Pumps: (1) Pump shall be controlled with an On-Off switch located in a field control panel at the pumps (2) In the"On"position,the pump shall be controlled by the wet well level through float switches. 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 8 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump (3) An elapsed time meter shall be provided in the field control panel for each motor to indicate totaled ruining time. (4) A red pilot light shall be provided in the field control panel for motor running. (5) A green pilot light shall be provided in the field control panel for motor off. (6) Pump shall automatically shut down when pump stator temperature or leak detection system is activated. Restart will require manual reset of temperature push button in field control panel and/or removal of liquid from pump lower stator housing. 11B5.2.6 Controls Panels: a. Control Panel Components: (1) Enclosure (2) On-Off Selector Switches (3) Motor Circuit Protection for each motor (4) Motor Starters (5) Circuit Breakers (6) Control Power Transformer (7) Control Relays (8) Enclosure space heater with thermostat (9) Elapsed time meter for each motor (10) Status Lights (11) "Leak"or"Thermal'Detection System (12) Lightning Arrestor (13) Wiring (14) Name plates as required b. Enclosure: Control panels shall conform to 3R Standards (with drip ledge) and be constructed of fiberglass- reinforced polyester-resin or stainless steel. Fiberglass panels shall be Hoffman AxxHzzzl2GQRLP or equivalent with quick-release latches with integral.Type 316L s.s.padlocking hasp,sealed seams and no holes or knockouts. Stainless steel panels shall be Hoffman AxxHzzz12SSLP or equivalent of min. 14 gauge Type 304 s.s. bodies and doors with continuously welded and ground smooth seams, rolled lip around three sides of door, s.s. door clamp or luggage latch type assembly, hasp and staple for padlocking, s.s. continuous hinge and smooth 44 brushed finish. Backpanels for mounting components shall be aluminum with stainless steel fasteners. Panels shall be completely dead front and shall have no equipment, pilot lights, pushbuttons or other devices installed in the exterior door. Exterior door shall be provided with thermoplastic data pocket on the interior. All such components required to be panel mounted shall be installed on an internally mounted,hinged, swing-out aluminum subpanel. All devices that require adjustment, such as timers, shall be accessible for adjustment without having to open the sub-panel. The subpanel shall have captive screw-fastened latches, shall be capable of being opened a full 90 degrees, and shall be grounded. Exterior doors shall be gasketed and pad-lockable. All external hardware shall be stainless steel. Panels shall be provided with external lugs for wall mounting. The panel shall be sized as required to contain all required components. c. Selector Switches: Selector switches shall be heavy duty, corrosion-resistant NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001, type SK or approved equal. d. Motor Circuit Protection: Short circuit and locked rotor protection shall be provided for each pump motor by a molded case circuit breaker with instantaneous magnetic trip. Trip and interrupting ratings shall be selected for actual motor full load and locked rotor amperage. Voltage rating shall be 480 minimum. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. e. Motor Starters: Magnetic type, full voltage start, non-reversing starters shall be provided for each pump motor. Starters shall be horsepower rated in accordance with NEMA standards (IEC ratings are not acceptable). Overload relays shall be NEMA Class 20 with one thermal element per motor phase and shall be manually reset. Overload reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. Starter coils shall be 120 volt. 11B5 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 9 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump f. Circuit Breakers: Control and accessory circuits 240 volt and less shall be provided with molded case circuit breakers for short circuit protection and switching. Breakers shall be UL listed for 120/240 volts with 10000 A.I.C. Switching or reset shall be accomplished without need to open the inner panel door. Circuit breakers shall be labeled with the device served(Area Light,RTU, etc...) g. Control Power Transformers(CPT): Transformers shall be low voltage resin filled general purpose epoxy encapsulated and shall be UL Listed and CSA Certified.. Transformers 500 VA and smaller shall be internally mounted machine tool type, specifically designed for high inrush currents of starter and relay coils. Secondary windings shall be fused and grounded. Fused switches shall be provided for 480-volt primary windings. Transformers larger than 500 VA shall be externally mounted outdoor rated dry type. Enclosure shall be stainless steel if external mounted and suitable for use indoors or outdoors. h. Control Relays: Relays for 120 and 24 volt circuits shall be industry standard plug-in type with tube type connectors. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps resistive,continuous. An internal light shall be provided to indicate relay energization. Relay sockets shall be the single-tier type. i. Power Monitor Relay: Incoming power shall be monitored by a plug in type relay which shall sense under or over voltage, phase loss or phase sequence charge and de-energized the control circuit when abnormal power conditions occur. Voltage drop out shall occur at 10%above or below an adjustable set point. Relay contacts shall delay one second prior to transfer under abnormal power supply and shall automatically reset 5 seconds after normal conditions are restored. A miniature pilot light on top of the relay shall be energized to indicate normal power conditions. Relay contacts shall be 10 amp resistive at 250 VAC, single pole double throw. j. Space Heater and Thennostat: A 120-volt, 50-watt spare heater shall be provided mounted to the panel back plate and equipped with a protective shield. A separate thermostat shall be provided for temperature control. The thermostat setting shall be adjustable to turn the space heater on at 30'to 100'F. k. Elapsed Time Meters: Meters shall be provided and mounted on the inner panel door to measure the running time of each pump. Meters shall be six digit, indicate tenths of hours and be non-resetable. Operating power shall be 120 volt. Relays and interlocks shall be provided to prevent operation of the meters when motor short circuit or overload devices are tripped. 1. Pushbuttons And Pilot Lights: Pushbuttons, pilot lights, etc., shall be full size, heavy duty, non-metallic, NEMA 4X, Square D Class 9001,type SK or approved equal.Pushbuttons shall be extended guard type. Pilot lights shall be push-to-test,transformer type. in. Leak/Thermal Relay: A pump "Control And Status" (CAS) relay provided by the pump manufacturer and specifically designed for use with the pump stator temperature and leak detection system, shall be mounted in the control panel and connected to the pump control circuit. The CAS relay shall be the plug in type and shall be easily removable for replacement. LED lights mounted on the front of the relay shall indicate "Normal", "Leak" or "Thermal' conditions. If a "Leak" occurs the relay shall remain energized until the liquid being sensed is removed. If a"Thermal' condition occurs the relay shall remain energized until manually reset by a push button on the control panel door. In the event of either a "Leak" or "Thermal" condition the pump motor shall be shut down, a pilot light on the control panel door labeled "CAS" shall be energized and a normally open contact for the remote supervisory alarm shall be closed. n. Lightning Arrestor: The incoming power supply shall be furnished with a surge arrestor to limit damage from lighting surges. The arrestor shall be the silicon oxide varistor type designed for 600 volt,three-phase service with a maximum rating of 100,000 amp with 1500-joule maximum energy. o. Wiring: Control panels shall be completely factory assembled and pre-wired. The pump supplier shall thoroughly test the control panel and level control system for proper operating sequence under all conditions before shipment of the panel to the jobsite. Control wiring shall be stranded copper,#14 AWG minimum size. Power wiring shall be stranded copper, #12 AWG minimum. All wiring 11B5 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 10 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump insulation shall be dual rated for Type THHN and THWN applications. All control wiring terminations shall be made using vinyl-insulated,crimp type connectors,with spade type lugs. Each control wire shall be labeled at each end with a pre-printed, tube type or heat-shrink type wire marker, or shall be color-coded. Wiring diagrams showing wire numbers or color-coding shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals(11135.12). Screw type terminal strips shall be provided and suitably identified for termination of field wire control circuits. Submittal drawings shall include wire identification and terminal numbers. Control terminal blocks shall be rated 300 volts minimum and shall provide four unidentified spare sets. Incoming power terminals shall be lug type rated 600 volts minimum. Separate bare copper ground lugs shall be provided for incoming and pump ground wire. p. Name Plates: Legend plate indicating the operating function of pilot devices(HOA,RUN,RESET, etc.) shall be aluminum with black background and white lettering. Circuit breakers shall be labeled with the device served(Area Light,RTU,etc...). Nameplates indicating the controlled device shall be black laminated plastic 1/2 inch wide with 1/4 inch white engraved lettering. Nameplates identifying the control panel and mounted on the exterior door shall be black laminated plastic one inch wide with 3/8 inch white lettering. Legends shall be mechanically attached with the pilot device.Nameplates shall be attached with stainless steel screws or epoxy. q. Voltage Warning Signs: Voltage warning signs shall be installed on all distribution enclosures or devices containing voltages over 120 volts to ground. Voltage warning signs on outdoor equipment shall be furnished and mounted by the supplier of the equipment. Signs shall read- "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE"and shall indicate the circuit voltage present within the enclosure. Multiple source signs shall be provided for any enclosure containing voltage sources from more than a single disconnecting means. Signs shall be yellow laminated plastic with 1/4"high engraved lettering. "CAUTION: Energized wiring from sources is contained in this unit. Provide label indicating circuit and panel name from each source. 105.2.5 Floats Controls: Float controls shall be furnished by the pump supplier and shall consist of the float switch, cable and hardware necessary to secure a neat permanent installation.Float switches shall be the non-floating type with internal weighting to keep the switch below water after tilting. Float switches shall be non-metallic with a normally open contact that closes on liquid level rise, except high level float shall be a normally closed contact. The switch shall consist of polypropylene float housing; mercury switch and neoprene jacketed control cable. Float housing shall be leakproof, shock and corrosion resistant. Mercury switch shall be metal-encased,shock resistant,with 10 amp, 120-volt contact,N.O. or N.C. as indicated by the control schematics. Floats shall be the product of Anchor Scientific,Inc.or Flygt or an approved equal. All float control circuits to operate at 24 VAC. Brackets and clamps shall be of the same manufacturer as the float control provided. Power cables shall be of adequate length to prevent splicing prior to terminal connection (provide excess cable to allow float adjustment). Hardware shall include cable clamps,brackets,pipe supports etc. All cable hardware shall be stainless steel construction. IIB5.2.6 Hardware: All nuts,bolts,washers,anchor bolts or any attachment hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 11B5.2.7 Anchorages: The equipment manufacturer shall furnish all anchor bolts,nuts,washers and gaskets necessary for the equipment furnished by him, as well as any templates required for setting the anchorage. The General Contractor shall place the anchorage in accordance with certified prints supplied by the equipment manufacturer. The minimum size of any drop-in anchor shall be 1/2"diameter. 105.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 105.3.1 Equipment And Materials Shipping And Storage: a. Preparation for Shipment: The pumping units shall be fully assembled and suitable crated for shipment. Electrical panels and components shall be protected from the weather and suitable packaged to facilitate handling and storage. All motors, electrical panels and components shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. b. Storage of Equipment: 11B5 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 11 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effluent Pump (1) All equipment stored on the Project Site shall be protected and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. (2) Electrical equipment must be stored in weatherproof, ventilated enclosures. Temporarily connect motor space heater until permanently installed. (3) Equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground directly. (4) The storage area shall be kept clean. 105.3.2 Installation: a. General: All installation shall be "First Class" and done in accordance with standard practice to provide a neat,structurally sound installation. The equipment shall be furnished complete by the manufacturer and shall be installed by the Contractor as directed by the manufacturer in his working drawings and written instructions. The installation shall be checked, tested and approved by a factory representative before acceptance. When installed, pumping units shall be level and in proper alignment. Piping shall not be in a"Bind". b. Installation of Anchorages: All cast in place anchor bolts shall be placed in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and templates. Length of the anchor bolts,depth of embedment and projection shall be in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's directions. Anchors other than cast in place shall be drop-in style (hole size equal bolt size)or chemical/capsule anchors and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions, particularly embedment length. After the concrete or the anchoring chemical has set,coat the threads of the anchor bolt(s)with"Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto. Threads of erection bolts shall also be coated with"Never Seize"or an approved equal before assembly. 11135 NOTE: Equip. in spec.11B5 Submersible Pumps being provided by City. Page 12 of 12 Greenwood WWTP Effl PS DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13C-REPAIRS,ADDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES 13C1[i] GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13C1.1 SCOPE: This specification shall govern for all work necessary to repair, renovate or modify the existing structures as required to complete the project. 13C1.2 SPECIFICATION TYPE: This specification is a performance specification as defined in Article TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 13C1.3 INTENT: It is the intent of this Section to summarize the scope of work required to provide the repairs,additions, modifications and connections and to provide additional information and requirements that are not specified in other sections. The following schedules are provided in an attempt to assist the Contractor with construction of required improvements in an orderly manner with minor disruption of the pump station operation. The Contractor may submit revisions to the proposed schedule for review by the Engineer. Contractor shall be coordinate with the Engineer and Plant Operators prior to initiation of any work items affecting the treatment process. 13CIA VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS: It is the intent of this specification that the Contractor shall verify all dimensions before starting demolition,modifications,renovations and the ordering of any material. 13C1.5 DEWATERING: Effluent pump station existing pump can be used to pump the station down as much as possible. Contractor shall be aware that the station will still contain an amount of treated effluent and may contain solids in the bottom of the wet well. Contractor shall provide all equipment,material and labor to completely dewater the pump station and clean out the wet well. All liquid to be removed from the pump stations after they are taken out of service for modifications shall be pumped or bailed to a manhole for return to the wastewater collection system. Contractor shall provide all equipment, material, and labor to completely clean the wet well of all solids. Solids from the wet well shall be removed and hauled by the Contractor to a sludge drying bed at the Greenwood WWTP. After the solids have dried the Contractor shall be responsible for removing the dried solids from the plant site, cleaning the bed to original condition and properly disposing of the solids at the Cefe Valenzuela Landfill(at the intersection of FM 2444 and CR 20). 13C1.6 SALVAGE: All items removed during pump station improvements shall be neatly piled at the site (out of the way of the construction operation)as directed by the Inspector. The Contractor shall notify the Wastewater Dept. upon removal of said items until it may be inspected by the Wastewater Dept. The Wastewater Dept. will, within seven (7) days after being notified, mark all items it wishes to keep. These items shall remain the property of the Wastewater Dept., especially the pump's upper guide rail bracket and guide rails. Any item not marked by the Wastewater Dept. shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site. 13C1.7 PHOTO DOCUMENTATION: Contractor shall document the existing conditions at the pump station site using photographs prior to moving on to the site and before undertaking any construction work. 13C1.8 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS: All fasteners,nuts,bolts,anchor bolts and washers shall be 316 stainless steel. Coat the threads of all stainless steel anchor bolts, erection bolts, fasteners, etc with "Never Seize" or an approved equal before attaching equipment thereto or before assembly. 13C1— 13C2 Special Construction Page 1 of 2 Greenwood WWTP Effl PS 13C1.9 CONFINED SPACE: Contractor shall meet OSHA requirements while performing work in confined spaces. 13C2 MODIFICATIONYREHABILITATION FOR EFFLUENT PUMP STATION 13C2.1 SCOPE OF WORK: This item includes but is not limited to the following items of work: 1. Contractor is responsible for obtaining an electrical permit prior to construction. 2. Coordinate with Wastewater Dept. for scheduling taking the Effluent Pump Station out of service. 3. Provide temporary air plug to insert into inlet pipe to isolate effluent flow to the pump station. 4. Pump out water in the wet well and clean out wet well completely of all solids, grit, debris, etc. from the floor,walls,etc. and haul off and properly dispose of. 5. Remove existing pump, pump accessories, pump base and concrete pad. Turn existing pump materials over to city and dispose of concrete. 6. Construct new concrete base for new pump base. 7. Install new pump base, pump accessories and pump(all provided by City). Secure new bases with 316 S.S.washers and nuts. 8. Modify existing discharge pipe as necessary to accommodate new pump base and fitting. Paint new fittings and disturbed coatings per Spec. 9K. 9. Construct new electrical duct bank from existing Electrical Control Room to the Effluent Pump Station electrical rack. 10. Remove existing and install new electrical devices, panels, gear, etc. and new pump control panel (control panel provided by the City). 11. Comple any remaining work shown on the plans and/or or described in the specifications. 13C2.2 SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION: 1. Order and collect all equipment and material necessary to begin and complete the improvements to the pump station. 2. Verify that the City provided pump, pump base, pump accessories and control panel have been delivered. 3. Verify size and number of inlet lines entering the pump station that need to be plugged to isolate the pump station. Contractor to order and have all plugs, material and equipment delivered to job site prior to taking the station out of service. 4. Complete all electrical work that can be accomplished prior to taking the pump station out of service. Coordinate and schedule with Inspector and Engineer time to inspect the completed work. 5. Contractor shall notify Wastewater Dept. staff and Engineer a minimum of two weeks or more prior to taking the pump station out of service. 6. Effluent Pump Station may only be completely out of service for no longer than five (5) consecutive calendar day period to complete these improvements. 7. Install isolation air plugs and take the pump station out of service. 8. Schedule power outage with the power company (when required). Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company for the power outages and taking the AEP power supply out of service. 9. Perform improvements to the wet well,install new pump and replace the electrical gear and panels and as outlined and detailed in the plans and specifications. 10. Coordinate and schedule with Inspector, Wastewater Dept. and Engineer time to inspect the completed work. Contractor shall demonstrate that pump is turning in correct direction. 11. As soon as these improvements are completed, inspected and accepted by City and Engineer, return the pump station back to service. 12. Remove all equipment, debris and salvaged material unwanted by City and return site to original conditions. 13C1— 13C2 Special Construction Page 2 of 2 26 01 26 ELECTRICAL TESTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED Furnish labor, material, equipment and incidentals of a NETA certified independent testing agency. Testing shall be inclusive of all medium voltage and low voltage equipment including conductors for the pump station. Testing shall include all relay protective schemes and operation of the low and medium voltage equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Independent testing agency shall be NETA certified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 0133 00, "Document Management" and shall include: A. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing installation checks, operation and testing of the medium voltage equipment. This report shall certify that 1)the equipment has been properly installed, 2) is in accurate alignment, 3) meets the acceptance testing specifications of NETA and the equipment manufacturer, and 4) NETA certification of the testing agency. B. ASSESSMENT REPORT A written report shall be submitted by the testing agency performing maintenance checks, operation and testing of the electrical equipment. The report shall be performed, sealed and signed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas. The report shall summarize the results of the analysis and include recommendations of equipment repair or replacement. The report shall also establish a timeframe to repair/replace equipment by giving a target date. 1.04 STANDARDS The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Electrical Testing 26 01 26-1 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL A. Perform all testing identified in the latest edition of NETA Standard for Accepting Testing Specifications B. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. Types of equipment required to be tested by these specifications shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Low voltage cables 2. Grounding 3. Motor Controls C. All testing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for energization and start-up of the equipment. D. Testing shall include a complete functionality testing of electrical equipment under all the different operating parameters identified by the OWNER and ENGINEER. E. Testing shall be in accordance with NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest edition. F. The following is a listing of the major equipment test to be performed. 1. Low Voltage Cables a. Insulation - resistance test. 2. Motor Controls a. Bolted Connections resistance test and torque verifications b. Operation and sequence testing for electrical and interlocks END OF SECTION Electrical Testing 26 01 26-2 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for complete and operational electrical systems, as specified herein. B. This Section, as well as Division 01, incorporate to all other Sections in Division 26, and shall be considered a part of each of those Sections as if written in their entirety. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Contractors' Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen,trained and experienced in their crafts, and who are familiar with the specifications and methods of performing the work in this Division. B. Workmanship: Work shall be performed in accordance with quality, commercial practices. The appearance of finished work shall be of equal importance with its operation. Materials and equipment shall be installed based upon the actual dimensions and conditions at the project site. Locations for materials or equipment requiring an exact fit shall be field measured. Conduit and motors shall be isolated to avoid unacceptable noise levels from objectionable vibrations from all systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in PDF format with proposed items clearly marked. Unmarked submittals shall be rejected. Submittals shall include: 1. Component catalog number and manufacturing data sheet, indicating pertinent data and identifying each component by the item number and nomenclature as specified. 2. Component drawings showing dimensions, mounting, and external connection details. 3. Complete control schematics and point to point wiring diagrams. 4. Unless other additional information is required by the detailed equipment specifications,the following information shall be included for motors: a. Motor identification number and nomenclature as specified. b. Make and motor type. c. Brake horsepower of the motor. d. Locked rotor current at full load. e. Motor efficiency at full load (three-phase motors only). f. Starting torque. g. Method of insulating and impregnating motor coils (three-phase only). h. Speed of the motor at full torque. i. Full load current. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-1 j. Service factor. k. Number of poles I. Motor temperature rise measured by resistance over 40 C ambient. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Electrical work shall be executed in accordance with local, State and national codes, ordinances and regulations which have jurisdiction or authority over the work. If the standards and codes conflict with each other,the most stringent shall apply. The applicable provisions of the following standard shall apply as if written here in their entirety: National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Uniform Building Code (UBC) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Local Utility Companies Local Electrical Ordinance Rural Electrification Association (REA) Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Association Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) B. Electrical work shall be performed under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician who holds a valid license in the State of Texas. C. Contractor shall submit the company names of the electrical contractor with the bid documents. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Follow the Manufacturer's directions for the delivery, storage and handling of equipment and materials.Tightly cover equipment and materials and protect it from dirt,water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment shall not be acceptable. Upon installation, protect the materials until the work is completed and accepted by the Owner. Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-2 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Permits, licenses and inspections shall be secured and paid for as required by law for the completion of the work. Certificates of approval shall be secured, paid for, and delivered to the Owner before receiving the final acceptance of the work. B. The location of materials, equipment, devices and appliances indicated are approximate and subject to revisions at the time the work is installed.The Contractor shall utilize approved manufacturer shop drawings for final layouts of equipment and raceways. Final location shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Should project conditions require any rearrangement of work, or if equipment or accessories can be installed to a better advantage than the general arrangement of work on the plans, the Contractor shall before proceeding with the work prepare and submit plans of the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer's review and approval. D. Motor Horsepower ratings identified are anticipated ratings. If the actual equipment is a different size,the contractor shall provide the appropriate wiring, conduit, over current protection, starters and accessories for a complete and working system at no cost to the owner. E. All enclosures for equipment unless specifically identified otherwise shall be NEMA 4X, 304 Stainless Steel for exterior installations, NEMA 1 for indoor enclosures. 2.00 EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain the waterproof integrity of conduit penetrations through the enclosures. B. The complete installation shall be watertight. 2.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Provide adequate support during cutting operations to prevent any damage to the affected masonry. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. The cutting of structural members shall not be permitted without the specific written approval of the Engineer. 2.03 EXCAVATION,TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND GRADING A. Prior to any excavation or trenching, notify the Owner's representative, utility companies and Owner's facilities department. Allow sufficient time for utilities to be located prior to excavation to avoid disruption of services. Provide a minimum of 72 hours written notice to the Owner prior to trenching or excavation. Do not proceed with trenching or excavation until authorized by the Owner. Utilities or services which are damaged, which are identified prior to excavation or trenching, or where confirmation by utility companies has not been obtained verifying that utilities are marked, shall be repaired to operable condition immediately, at no cost to the Owner. B. Barricade open trenches and excavations for the entire duration of the project. Barricades for excavations shall have warning lights maintained during hours of darkness. Trenches shall be marked with warning tape, or access to trenches shall be prohibited with readily Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-3 identifiable sawhorses, warning tape or other acceptable means. Barriers shall be illuminated or recognizable during hours of darkness. Barriers and tape shall be properly maintained at all times. C. Protect all adjacent work, structures and properties. Damage to adjacent work, structures or properties shall be repaired, or the cost of repair reimbursed in full. D. All construction areas shall be finally graded as indicated on the contract documents or to the conditions of the site prior to construction. Grading shall bring the site back to the existing conditions as close as practical. Turfed areas shall be sodded, or hydro-mulched with matching turf. Landscaping shall be replaced with identical shrubbery, ground cover, or plants as existed. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining water on new turf and landscaping until established. If new turf and landscaping is impractical due to weather conditions, contractor shall provide satisfactory arrangements to have turf and landscaping furnished and installed at the earliest opportunity thereafter. Provide a 90-day warranty on new turf and landscaping. 2.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. The identification of electrical equipment shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC,the local authorities, and as specified. B. Use laminated three-ply engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interior core, at least 1/16 inch thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 inch high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment with stainless steel screws. Adhesive attachment is only acceptable on NEMA 4X enclosures. Identify the following items with engraved nameplates, located as follows: 1. Each switch/fuse unit or circuit breaker in each main panel and each distribution panel - adjacent to switch/fuse unit or circuit. 2. Spares shall be labeled "Spare". 3. Each branch circuit panel -on panel trim cover immediately above panel door. 4. Each safety disconnect switch, relay cabinet, control panel -on outside of cover. 5. Each exhaust fan switch -custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate (high and low if required). 6. Instrument transmitters and sensors. 7. Each motor starter-on outside cover. 8. Each Variable Frequency Drive. 9. Outside light switches- custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. 10. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point-custom engraved on outside of switch cover plate. C. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten. Cover with plastic and attach to the inside of the cabinet door. Spares shall be labeled as "Spare." Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-4 D. Refer to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for conductor coding requirements. E. Install special custom engraved switch cover plates with engraving on the outside of the cover plate at outside light switches, and at any switch for equipment which is out of sight from the control point. F. Install same brand/manufacturer fittings throughout the project. Install UL listed products. Fasteners, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. 2.05 LOCKING OF ELECTRICAL FACILITIES A. Install locks immediately upon the installation of the electrical facility. Provide padlocks for exterior electrical facilities subject to unauthorized entry. Furnish the Owner with two keys per lock up to a quantity of 10 keys. Furnish locks to match the Owner's locking system. Key all locks alike. 2.06 ACCESS DOORS A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pull boxes or other electrical equipment, provide and install access doors. Install panels in locations approved by the Engineer. Paint as directed. 2.07 CLEAN AND ADJUST A. Remove shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from equipment. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of work, clean electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation. 2.08 TESTING A. See each section for particular testing requirements for each type of equipment. END OF SECTION Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 00-5 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install 600-volt wires and cables. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." B. Work shall include building wire, cable, wiring connections and terminations, and modular wiring systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing: Megger test circuits for continuity and ground. Verify phasing at connection points. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to the Manufacturer's recommended values. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA and/or NRTL C. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include: 1. Product Data for each type of product 2. Field Test/Quality Control Reports 3. Qualification Data for Testing Agency 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA) Standards: NEMA WC-3 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy NEMA WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver cable and wire to the project site in the original packages. Conductors with damaged insulation or exposed nylon jacketing shall not be permitted. 2.00 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-1 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation;Alcan Cable Division 2. Alpha Wire 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation 6. Southwire Incorporated 7. Okonite Company(Preferred) B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658 for Type THHN,Type THWN, and Type XHHW or as indicated on the drawings. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA 5-95-658 for Tray Cable,Type TC with ground wire. E. Conductors: Soft-drawn, annealed copper with a conductivity of not less than that of 98 percent pure copper bearing the U.L. label. The minimal size shall be#12. F. Single Conductors: Conductor with thermoplastic insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. Wire in light fixture channels and other special locations shall be as specifically noted for temperature in NEC Article 300. G. Ground Wire: Tinned, Class B stranded conductor without insulation H. Paired Shielded Cable: 18 gauge, 7/28 stranded, tinned copper conductors with 0.015-inch extruded PVC; 0.004-inch nylon insulation twisted into pairs, stranded into a core and enclosed by a non-hygroscopic core tape, 100 percent coverage, helically wound, aluminum foil shield, drain wire, and 0.045-inch minimum extruded PVC jacket. Pairs shall be black/red or black/white numbered. Cables shall be 600 volts in accordance with NEC-725 and IEEE 383. I. Triad Shielded Cable (RTD Cable): RTD cable shall have the following characteristics: 1. Eight triads each with three 18 AWG conductors 2. Triads shall each have individual shield and overall shield. 3. Each conductor insulated for 600 V and entire cable rated for 90 C. Primary Insulation 15 mils nominal; PVC; 4 mils nylon Number of Conductors 3 Color Code Black and white and red Group Identification Each triad numbered Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-2 100%coverage; .35 mil aluminum x .5 mil Mylar tape and Pair Shield 20 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; shield tape to be applied to give a total shield isolation from all other triad shields. Cable Shield 100%coverage; 2.35 mil aluminum Mylar tape shield and an 18 gauge 7 strand tinned copper drain wire. Jacket Black 90 C FIR PVC J. Tray Cable: Type TC; multi-conductor cable specifically approved for the installation in cable trays, in accordance with NEC Article 340. Each cable conductor shall be insulated with THHN/THWN or XHHW type insulation rated at 600 volts. The individual conductors shall be twisted together and jacketed with a PVC outer covering containing a U.L. label and necessary identification, including the Manufacturer,the number of conductors, size, insulation type, sun-resistance, and other pertinent information. K. Telephone Wire: Telephone station wire conductors shall be bare solid, annealed copper, 22 AWG insulated with high density polyethylene. Insulated conductors shall be twisted and assembled in a weather and flame resistant compound of polyvinyl chloride. Color coding shall be one red, one green, one yellow, and one black. The wire shall comply with REA Specification PE-20. 2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation 6. NSi Industries LLC 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division 9. Tyco Electronics/ Raychem (Preferred) B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, Ampacity rating, material, type and class for application and service indicated. 2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 by a qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-3 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Completely swab raceway system before installing conductors. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants which have a deleterious effect on the conductors or their insulation. 3.02 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Stranded Copper B. Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper 3.03 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway B. Exposed Feeders:Type XHHW single conductors in raceway C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions and Crawlspaces: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC F. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade and Underground: Type XHHW single conductors in raceway H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Tray Cable Type TC 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Unless necessary for pulling purposes, conductors shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block without splice. Condulet type fittings shall not contain splices. No splicing of conductors shall be performed in any below ground structure. 2. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes. Neatly train wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards. Pull conductors into a raceway at the same time and use U.L. listed,wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wire. Install raceway first as a complete system without conductors. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place. 3. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: a. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers are not acceptable. b. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-4 c. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. d. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3- 23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). e. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. f. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2,4, 6). 4. Wire other than telephone station wire shall be stranded. The minimum size conductor permitted is#12 AWG, except as specifically indicated on the plans. Wire shall bear the approval of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Conductors terminated on a screw termination shall have a crimp on type spade connector applied on the wire end, Panduit PanTerm or approved equal. 5. Color coding of cables shall comply with the local city codes. In the absence of a local color coding requirement,the following shall be used: a. For 480/277-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Gray Equipment Grounding Conductor Green b. For 208/120 or 240/120-V, 3-phase wiring: Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green c. For 240/120-V, 1-phase wiring: Leg A Black Leg B Red Neutral White Equipment Grounding Conductor Green Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-5 6. Colored, vinyl marking tape shall be allowed only on conductors greater than 8 AWG. Under no condition shall conductors of a different color be spliced together. 7. Grouping conductors together into one conduit shall not be allowed where the plans indicate the conductors to be placed in separate conduits. Each home run shown on the plans shall be in its own conduit. B. Single Conductors: Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except at outlets. Sufficient wire shall be left at outlets to make connections to equipment without straining. C. Paired Shielded and Triad Shielded Cable: Ground paired shielded and triad shielded cables at the instrument panel end only and insulate from ground elsewhere. The shield shall be continuous for the entire run. The paired shielded and triad shielded cable shall not be laced with or placed in the same conduit with power cables. Each termination of paired shielded or triad shielded cable shall be coated with silicone jelly after termination. The shield of pair shielded cable and triad shielded cable shall only be broken when the conductors are terminated on terminal strips. D. Ground Conductors: 1. Conduits and other raceway shall contain an equipment grounding conductor whether the raceway is metallic or not. Conduits, motors, cabinets, outlets, and other equipment shall be properly grounded in accordance with National Electric Code requirements. Where ground wire is exposed to mechanical damage, install wire in rigid aluminum conduit. Make connections to equipment with solderless connections. Wire connections to the ground rods of the ground mat shall be of the fused type equal to the Cadweld process. 2. Ground metallic material, including but not limited to metallic raceway, metallic boxes and metallic enclosures. Where metallic material is not connected by raceway to a solid ground, connect the metallic material to the largest equipment grounding conductor which it houses. Clean the metal surface under the grounding lug to bright metal. Connections to motors shall be to the grounding stud which shall be threaded into the stationary frame; Burndy KC Servit, or approved equal and not an end bell. The ground wire shall not be lugged to a mounting bolt. 3. Ground wire shall be uninsulated tinned copper sized as shown on the plans in all cases where a single ground wire is indicated to be installed in a conduit with no other conductors in the conduit, or where the ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete. In all other cases, insulate ground wire with insulation as specified for low voltage wire. END OF SECTION Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2605 19-6 26 05 19.01 WIRE CONNECTIONS AND DEVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install wire connections and devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 600-volt connectors shall comply with the specifications and the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: a. Burndy. b. Thomas & Betts. c. Ideal Industries. d. Ilsco e. Gould Shawmut f. Allen Bradley g. Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include all applicable wire connectors and devices. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS A. Connectors, Compression: For splicing and termination; 600-volt wiring; connectors for cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation (soldered connections shall not be permitted). B. Connectors, 600-Volt Twist-On: Spring insulated, properly sized and resistant to vibration; may be used for No. 14 through No. 10 gauge conductors. C. Connectors, 600-Volt Terminal: Of the appropriate hole sizes and spacing which are in accordance with NEMA standards;two holes in the tongue for use on conductor sizes 250 MCM or larger; not required for connections to the circuit breakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels. D. 600-Volt Plastic Tape: Minnesota Mining& Manufacturing Company, No. 35. Wire Connections and Devices 26 OS 19.01-1 E. Wirenuts: Buchannan B-Cap, Ideal, ITT or Panduit spring wire connecting devices with plastic covering; shall be reusable after initial installation and removal. 3M Scotchloks shall not be installed on this project. F. Mechanical Set Screw Connector: Blackburn HIPS, ADR-ALCUL, GP or GT, Burndy or Ilsco; consisting of an aluminum body which has openings on opposite ends for insertion of the conductors. Conductors inserted into these holes shall each be clamped by two set screws. Connectors shall be suitable for use with copper conductors. G. Rubber Tape: Scotch 2210. H. Vinyl Tape: Scotch 88. I. Insulating Resin: Scotch 3576, 3577, or 3578. J. Power Distribution Blocks: Gould Shawmut, Ilsco or Allen Bradley; rated for 600 VAC and termination of copper conductors. Individual poles shall be constructed of tin plated aluminum and mounted on an insulating base. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with a minimum of three layers of plastic tape. Half-lap each layer. B. Splice 600-volt conductors in junction boxes or at outlets only. C. For No. 10 and smaller, connect conductors with a twist-on spring wirenut. If a splice or tap is below 3 feet above the final grade, fill the spring connectors with an electrical insulating resin so that conductor and spring materials are encapsulated by the resin. Conductor splices and taps inside the VFD's shall be on the terminal strips or power distribution blocks. D. For No. 8 and larger, connect conductors with a mechanical, set screw type connector. Wrap splices and taps with a single half-lapped layer or rubber tape followed by successive layers of vinyl tape until a vinyl tape layer thickness of twice the original conductor insulation thickness is achieved. If splice or tap is below 3 feet above the finished grade,the tape or splice shall have a final outer coating or insulating resin. E. Furnish and install power distribution blocks as shown on the plans for tapping conductors at their load connection point with conductors of smaller size. Install power distribution blocks with the number of poles and sizes needed for connecting the phase, neutral, and ground conductors. F. Pair shielded cable shield and triad shielded cable (RTD cable) shield shall be broken at terminal strips only. END OF SECTION Wire Connections and Devices 26 OS 19.01-2 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install a complete grounding system in strict accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall include: 1. Grounding materials, equipment and processes. 2. Product Data: For each type of product supplied. 3. Field quality-control test reports. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 5. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Measure the ground grid resistance with the earth test megger and install additional ground rods and conductors as required until the resistance to the ground conforms to National Electrical Code requirements. Ground resistance measurement shall not exceed 5 ohms. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, having a diameter of 3/4 inch and a minimum length of 10 feet. B. Ground Cables: Stranded, bare tinned copper of 98 percent conductivity and as specified in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Conduit Ground Fittings: Fittings for bonding ground cable to the conduit shall be FCI Burndy Corp.,type NE or Thomas& Betts No. 3951 series or approved equal. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 D. Ground Rod Boxes: Precast Box with cast iron lid. Lid shall read "ground rod" on lid. Brooks Precast Model. "3-RT" or approved equal. Ground rod boxes located in driveway areas shall have an AASHO H-20 rating. E. Ground Plate Electrodes: 20 gauge copper with terminated 2-foot welded pigtail connection. 2.02 PROCESSES A. All grounding system connections to building steel and ground rods shall be exothermically welded including all cable connections, and cable steel terminations. B. All materials involved must be from the same sources to insure compatibility. Connections made from this process shall meet the requirements of IEEE Standards 80 and 837 and as listed in MIL 419 and other standards, National Electrical Code, etc. C. All welding materials used shall be Cadweld Materials—as manufactured by ERICO Products, Inc., or approved equal. 2.03 GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Provide a grounding system that includes all connections and the testing of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits,fittings, anchor supports, thermite process materials and equipment and other materials required for a complete installation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted/clamp type connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermically welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Exothermically welded connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermically welded connectors. B. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250 and local codes. C. Install ground cables in conduits above grade or directly buried in earth to a depth of not less than 12 inches below grade. Installation to provide sufficient mechanical protection so as not to break ground cables or connections. D. Install ground cables continuously between connections. Splices shall not be permitted, except where indicated on the plans. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildings, etc., and when not in metallic enclosures, provide a sleeve of approved, non- metallic materials. E. Install a green-colored, equipment grounding conductor in raceways. Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-2 F. Where ground wire is directly buried in earth or concrete, use standard bare tinned copper cable, in all other cases install a green-colored insulation, equipment grounding conductor in accordance with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Size conductors in accordance with NEC Article 250. Provide grounding conductors as required per the NEC. G. Metal conduits stubbed up into switchgear, motor control center or other electrical equipment shall be terminated with insulated grounding bushings and connected to the equipment ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with applicable sections of the National Electrical Code. H. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. 2. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 3. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 4. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. I. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus,to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. J. Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install a copper bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. K. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1 foot to 1 foot-2 inches or larger shall have bonding jumpers. Bonding jumpers shall be external, run in parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps. L. All equipment enclosures, motor and transformer frames, conduit systems, cable armor, exposed structural steel and all other equipment and materials required by the NEC to be grounded, shall be grounded and bonded in accordance with the NEC. Provide grounding and bonding jumpers as required per the NEC. M. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized in accordance with NEC Article 250. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-3 N. Run a grounding cable the full length of each cable tray section and bond to each cable tray section. Provide#4/0 bare copper in cable tray. O. Where exothermic bonding is used, molds shall be of the appropriate size for the wire and rod used. All bonds shall remain exposed for inspection of the Owner's Representative. P. Ground rod shall be installed such that the top of the ground rod is 6 inches below grade and enclosed by a ground rod box. Q. Install #4/0 AWG bare tinned copper ground cable that follows the route of the underground duct banks on top of the duct bank envelop, but in no case is embedded in the concrete. Run ground through the manholes. Tie ground cable to pump station main grounding system at both ends. R. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave a sufficient length of#12 wire with green-colored insulation to connect to the grounding terminal at the receptacle. S. Signal and Communication Equipment: 1. For telephone, alarm,voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet,wiring closet, and central equipment location. 2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect the grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Use Biddle Direct Reading Earth Resistance Tester or equivalent to measure resistance to ground of the system. Perform testing in accordance with the test instrument manufacturer's recommendation using the fall of potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. C. All test equipment shall be provided under this section and approved by the Engineer. D. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season. Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground. E. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system. F. A separate test shall be conducted for each building or system. G. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is greater than the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA or less: 5 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity more than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-4 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards serving electronic equipment: 1 ohm. 5. Substations and Pad Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner's Representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. Provide additional ground rods and conductors as required to bring the resistance to required level. END OF SECTION Grounding and Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 26-5 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install supporting devices. Electrical work shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical." 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code—Steel". B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified together with Concrete Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Div 01 and shall include all applicable units, materials and appurtenances for the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze Hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel Slotted Channel Systems. Include Product Data for Components. 3. Equipment Supports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT,ANCHORAGE AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4,factory fabricated components for field assembly. For this project, all steel supports shall be 316 stainless steel or aluminum materials where approved. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 d. GS Metals Corporation. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut;Tyco International, Ltd. (Preferred) g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Stainless Steel and aluminum hangers, clamps and associated fittings designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36A 36M, steel plates, shapes and bars; black and hot dipped galvanized. E. Mounting, Anchoring and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-316 stainless steel stud,for use in hardened Portland cement concrete, steel or wood with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) b. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. c. MKT Fastening, LLC. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, 316 stainless steel for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with tension, shear and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Hilti Inc. (Preferred) d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-2 3. Concrete Inserts: Stainless Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, stainless steel type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: 316 Stainless steel Structural type, hex head and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: 316 Stainless steel All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded galvanized steel. 2.02 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions and bare weight of supported equipment. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacing less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall % Inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps or single bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.02 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in the Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 2001b. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-3 D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface Mounted Equipment Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard weight concrete, 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers and other devices on slotted channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section (05 50 00 ?) "Metal Fabrications"for site fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.04 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than the supported unit and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base. B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa) 28-day compressive strength. Install concrete materials, reinforcement and placement requirements as per drawings and details. C. Anchoring Equipment to Concrete Base: 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings,templates, diagrams, instructions and directions furnished with items to be embedded/mounted. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts in accordance with anchor bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-4 3.05 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching-up field painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Hangers and Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 29-5 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems"for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit. B. RGS: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. C. EMT: Electrical Metalic Tubing. D. RNC: Rigid Non Metallic conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit F. FMC: Flexible Metal Conduit 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, standard floor boxes, standard hinged-cover enclosures, and standard cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-1 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUITS,TUBING,AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company. 13. Approved Equal B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum. 3. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-2 G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints. J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS,TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Carlon 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 13. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits,tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-3 F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A. G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B. H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485. I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14. J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.03 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric—(Preferred). 5. Approved equal. B. Description: Stainless steel, hot dipped galvanized, or aluminum, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250,Type 1,Type 3R,Type 4X, as indicated on drawings unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type NEMA 3R, Screw-cover type NEMA 1, NEMA 4X flanged-and- gasketed as indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.04 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-4 1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 5. Approved equal. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with stainless steel captive screws. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets. D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners. E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.05 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company—(Preferred). 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-5 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. 18. Approved equal. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum,Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) or 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). J. Gangable boxes are prohibited. K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250,Types as indicated with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid Aluminum. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-6 2. Concealed Conduit,Aboveground: Rigid Aluminum. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC,Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Underground Conduit Stub-ups to Equipment Pads, Concrete Floors or Other: Utilize Long Radius Sweeps for transition from underground ductbank to above ground. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250,Type 4X SS as indicated. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid Aluminum 4. Exposed in Electrical Room: Rigid Aluminum C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size except for lighting circuit taps not longer than 72". D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid Aluminum Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth. G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-7 F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits,for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached or as otherwise dictated by Code. I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm)trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Engineer for each specific location. 5. Change from ENT to PVC coated RGS or Rigid Aluminum as per conditions before rising above floor. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm)trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm)trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm)trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-8 each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. R. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground aluminum that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: a. Revise list below to include all locations in Project with environmental conditions that require considering expansion-joint fittings in conduit runs. For each Project, consider only locations with PVC conduit with straight-run length exceeding 25 feet (7.6 m) or metal conduit in lengths over 100 feet(30 m). Also revise temperature change for each location so it safely represents conditions anticipated. Temperature-change figures below are examples of maximum total swings from the lowest to the highest environmental temperatures at the indicated types of locations and must be revised to represent temperature swings or changes that may occur at Project locations. b. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. c. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C)temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)that provide expansion and Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-9 contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Y. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Z. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. AA. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure with stainless steel hardware. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Duct Bank—Install duct bank per drawing and details. B. Direct-Buried Conduit: Not Permitted for this Project 3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-10 3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 33-11 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 1.03 DEFINITION A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement. 3. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. 4. Warning tape. 5. Warning planks. B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details. C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-1 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. 2. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858. C. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency. D. Source quality-control test reports. E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending,warping, and deforming. B. Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than 7 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission. 1.09 COORDINATION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-2 A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field. B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to and handholes, and as approved by Architect. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. B. Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. As per section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems". 2.02 HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. Color: Green. 2. First option in first subparagraph below facilitates bottom duct entry. Second option may be provided by a separate slab placed in the excavation under an open-bottom enclosure;third option is obtained by molding or fabricating the bottom integrally with the body of the unit. 3. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." Or as indicated for each service. 7. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure,fixed installation in enclosure wall. 8. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. B. Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-3 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation. d. NewBasis. e. Approved equal. C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast. e. Approved equal. D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of fiberglass. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products. c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc. d. Approved equal. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037. B. Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-4 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A City provided qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. 3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION A. Ducts for Electrical Cables Over 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete- encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. C. Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated. D. Underground Ducts Crossing paved paths,walks, driveways, roadways or railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete. 3.02 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Telephone, Communications, and Data Wiring: 1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete, SCTE 77,Tier 15 structural load rating. 3. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer concrete units, SCTE 77,Tier 8 structural load rating. 4. Units Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf(13 345-N)vertical loading. 3.03 EARTHWORK A. Excavation and Backfill: Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment. B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed. C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling,fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-5 3.04 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated. C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Duct Entrances to Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c.for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m)from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet (3 m) outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to- conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-)test nylon cord in ducts, including spares. H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts,with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-6 b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches (75 mm) between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches (50 mm) between ducts for like services, and 4 inches (100 mm) between power and signal ducts. 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches (600 mm) below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches (750 mm) below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm)from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A. Precast Concrete Handhole Installation: 1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-7 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade. D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure. E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed. F. For enclosures installed in asphalt paving or earth and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavy-vehicle loading,form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. Concrete: 3000 psi (20 kPa), 28-day strength, complying with Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete," with a troweled finish. 1. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep). 3.07 GROUNDING A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-8 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. 3.09 CLEANING A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner,with graduated washer sizes,through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts. B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION Underground Ducts And Raceways For Electrical Systems 26 05 43-9 26 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Round sleeves. 2. Rectangular sleeves. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Sleeve-seal fittings. 5. Grout. 6. Pourable sealants. 7. Foam sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for additional abbreviations, definitions, submittals, qualifications, testing agencies, and other Project requirements applicable to Work specified in this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROUND SLEEVES A. Steel Wall Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Flexicraft Industries. b. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. 2. General Characteristics: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends and integral waterstop. B. PVC Pipe Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. GPT; an EnPro Industries company. b. Metraflex Company(The). Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-1 2. General Characteristics:ASTM D1785, Schedule 40. C. PVC Molded Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. ABB, Electrification Business. b. American Polywater Corporation. 2. General Characteristics: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. D. Round, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. General Characteristics: Galvanized-steel sheet; thickness not less than 0.0239 inch; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. 2.2 RECTANGULAR SLEEVES A. Rectangular, Galvanized-Steel, Sheet Metal Sleeves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Specified Technologies, Inc. b. Wiremold; Legrand North America, LLC. 2. General Characteristics: a. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. b. Minimum Metal Thickness: 1) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inch and with no side larger than 16 inch,thickness must be 0.052 inch. 2) For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter not less than 50 inch or with one or more sides larger than 16 inch,thickness must be 0.138 inch. 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Advance Products&Systems, LLC. 2. American Polywater Corporation. 3. Flexicraft Industries. B. General Characteristics: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable or between raceway and cable. C. Options: Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-2 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Holdrite; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. B. General Characteristics: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit must have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. 2.5 GROUT A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. W. R. Meadows, Inc. B. General Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors. 1. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade, Non-Fire-Rated, Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall or floor so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. b. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07 90 00 "Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking." 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-3 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless sleeve-seal system is to be installed or seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inch above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Wall Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for wall assemblies. C. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve-seal systems. Use PVC sleeves where subject to H2S corrossion. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. E. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: 1. Install steel pipe sleeves with integral waterstops. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Install sleeve during construction of floor or wall. 2. Install steel pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1 inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. Grout sleeve into wall or floor opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RECTANGULAR SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS A. Install sleeves in existing walls without compromising structural integrity of walls. Do not cut structural elements without reinforcing the wall to maintain the designed weight bearing and wall stiffness. B. Install conduits and cable with no crossings within the sleeve. C. Fill opening around conduits and cables with expanding foam without leaving voids. D. Provide metal sheet covering at both wall surfaces and finish to match surrounding surfaces. Metal sheet must be same material as sleeve. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building. Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-4 B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. END OF SECTION 26 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling 26 05 44-5 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. S. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, are not acceptable. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Circuits shall be tagged at terminations (both ends), in pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures as follows: Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 1. Tags relying on adhesives or tapes-on markers are not acceptable. 2. Provide conductor tags for conductors No. 10 AWG and below with legible permanent sleeve of yellow or white PVC with machine printed black marking, Raychem TMS sleeves or approved equal. 3. Provide tags for cables and for conductors No. 8 AVWG and larger consisting of permanent nylon marker plates with legible designations hot stamped on the plate. Attach these marker plates to conductors and cables with plastic wire wraps. Tags shall be Raychem TMS-CM cable markers or approved equal. 4. Tags shall be imprinted with panelboard and panelboard position number(e.g. LA3-23) for conductors fed from panelboards. Other conductors shall have tags imprinted with the MCC which feeds the conductors (e.g. MCC 1). 5. Switchlegs shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus an "S" suffix. Travelers shall have the designation described above on their tags, plus a "T" suffix. 6. Where more than one neutral is present with a group of conductors, a tag shall be applied to each neutral indicating which phase conductors are served by each neutral (e.g. HA-2, 4, 6). 2.02 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.03 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Tape: 1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils. B. Color and Printing: 1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE 2.04 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-2 1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to,the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER- ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD- EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING -OSHA REGULATION -AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with stainless steel mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. G. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and hndholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-3 1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service,feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. B. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. C. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to,the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. D. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. E. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-4 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: stainless steel screws and nuts, engraved and laminated nameplates. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment,fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be laminated acrylic or melamine label and placed in a clear plastic sleeve. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Switchgear. d. Switchboards. e. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. f. Motor-control centers. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Push-button stations. k. Contactors. I. Monitoring and control equipment. m. UPS equipment. n. Junction and Pull Boxes. END OF SECTION Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-5 (fMg)910MS%1 saowag 6uuaaut6u3;o 3uaueyoda4 33 A3MUM N WM AO MMA SFI Amu 30793u �a� ,s XIaNI aNV 133HS 3-1111 00 .93�',;;;'`.V, .,,IUSSNIEMN 11SI21HO $71100 1��11l7 :uiw'riri"ro'iiu'rri' IVJrY 3 n -40 ADD S1N3N3AOi1dWl 9NIdWfld 1N3flli�3 ''`} 0 '", .- d1NUN 400MN33219 NOIANOS3O AB 3LY0 I'ON NOISM NOUMOS30 7 ML 'ON NOISMN VZ'ZZ'LL SNV-1d 43MJ0jNO3 3 N z (n O U w < z o O a zo U z oz o o U N z c� z U W Q Q 0 Z d ZS zO Z O N a �U�// N o WozjwQ O h a��w��zw L.L Q W J J J J J J r w W Q Q Q Q Q Q a X 2~U U U U U U J W W z— f- Z O J LJi W W W W W W w ` z W J J J J J J �(y, G y W H H W W W W W W W "`Y d, U w S W W (y Q ��/i NW �NMa�fD r`a0 y £�` 00 Q F2 U -/0 O o r2 a m 3 oT U zM W 3� g 9�0 �H`25by CL m B_H za NN �05 J - 4 U 3Nndry 3= vx �"yiss � rs e �M �1a INOd m rr^^ �Ll NOUVOMN $ ( 99Z H 9 z W 803M 30P N co _a F9L KJ m O N N Q � a O vi O W �a Ul N S� 0HWJ09 Q w Z U OONJItlYlO OOOMNtlVl0 8 LL, Z CL ON Unos Q- Cr W0aory OW N QC W Ld ON 30MV4 �w Lj— ON 1370LA Lij a e Imo Sim mm sajwaS 5uuaaut5u3;o 3uaueyoda4 SN lS3S aNb' Nb'�d 3'd 73wm N w 9I 9 mvm SFI MM ��Yy 1Ni=9u N]'JIM91d/mm ,a, - W i N -..ot m m� 1N3n3OF�d321 dnnd 1N3n-dd3 _ N svx31 7:'�sioic'"'� �JNItl33NIiJN3 I1S121H0 S!)d210� � J � c n �o ,lllo S1N3W3AOi1dWl 9NIdWfld 1N3flli�3 4'"r.�,''°• d11NM 400MN33219 � ---0AB 3Ltl0 'ON NOIS- NONdIHO530 A8 3LM 1'ON NOISN39 VZ'ZZ'LL SNV-ld 43V4H03N00 3 Y n O O W O W X^ d a3 SZ NO 0 =U W Q Q 9 W w� m Q d^ mo w co i N ="I w z O Q 0 LZiJ J�k - Q° W N p z m \ Odz Z� w O_ W N YnN 0111 ,V)z�' W U\ N�o U �� W W� Z C0 - zw� O z z O Q W M w d N 2 z Md Z w U U d F K ~ x X Z z (D ❑ w w Q Q _ z w M ¢ LL 9viw Ad„£ W Q Y N a Q O �Lj � m (6 j m w a oU N z Op p a � E oN o U � U w� _ w �Y a °, 3J z �3U x UjQ Fn NG ❑ F w J Q 7 r21 W� !� Nm Z 9 xo ¢ 0 w W �3m OD ��^- iw U Y �wz0 r'1¢A O ~U Jmd aox 'aw o M0(D � O F❑Q o >m- � ILU z� o O Q d a a a o (zzlso�PI�C O w z miI WW. $ �^ ❑ ..a z}, m O >- w O m Uw OLLJ z w w H\M w Q L2W a m w �� az cn / W z Q i IJ ❑ �- w 3a �� m x Z" ❑vi CD a �o Gd Z vi o a g F t5< X o W - J in z �m 3€ z eo3 ❑ o cW § Z_ D 0 W d 6 S Y d U5 N WmaO gW grpz k� z= �3 a-p w Z LSD W ~tj `S' 0� m > LLJ W Q m z Q z Z <ti::. m'I W J 0 vo N W(n W~. ::i.. n m J> n m� W a- "IfWH d j�� iow Ox Z� �5i cD VYU(nJli� a �a� ❑o �w �_ �5i C.D Lj 3Jwtwn0 � Nza¢m �N Ld �dz o � x oOdJ a za¢ m �Q000� �0- � zW � W C 3: 0leD m N= le O LLJ p 0 Lu g O o 0 w w Q Z I`7ofl F 7 W p d' W U7' > D CC Y (r O w O i Z OU p¢Q f n C) W Y o 0 d ❑ K im U e pp®0 P N sa0inlag 6uuaau16u3;o ;uawNoda(7 Cy) Ndld 311S IVOId1O333 `O �ew • e SV'X31 � 3 ��` 'JNIkf�3Nl'JN3 usiaHo sndaoo W 7 ar'e �a�, I7rrY I� wd M�9Z1�1 jp .flip S1N3W3�0?JdWI ONIdWfld 1N3flldd3 � � � e°oao00 d1MM QOOMN11K y 0o NONdIN0530 A9 3LV0 'ON N01-8 NONd,—a A8 3LY➢ 'ON NOISN3tl VZ'ZZ'LI SNV-ld 43W2i0dNO3 v o c o � � F s UPIs oawm co LLJ g z 9 g gs sg 3 ¢w 3 d 3 p U F 3 wU ��jl�Irc wr W w a S o U K 0 O d 8Z5LLJ _R 2 � W O w w CD = LLJ O N N U O O O J w w O LJ WQ u U !n N w U - S Q i1 O 0 a II � o I II On 3 , IS I� e' w �a - ✓" avoa ssa 3138ON0 0 I I s /avJcl I o II I R III Pu�a NPv El E 8 8 o I - lei------ --- w� Z a �w ` II x o Q U ILI J " Sw ----------------- 0 3 8 I o e pp®0 P N saowag 6uu..u15u3;o ;uawNodap NOIII]OW3a IVOI 0313 `O a �•w �••We SV'X31 N 0 �e° 'JNIkf�3Nl'JN3 ilsiaHo sndaoo Do= jp 111J S1N3W3AOddWl ONIdvind 1N3flldd3 'o oo••°°Q 000° d1MM QOOMN11K y oa 0o NONdIN�53a A9 7. 13LY➢ 'ON N.- VZ'ZZ'LL SNV-ld 43W2i0dNOO v A W F 3 Q a p � Z v5 €�8 8 wad 9< owo * Z � N3c�i �< �� ��w �wca � O � O HE O� d�� =gP -"� w v � Q cn U s • U go o Q jl Of CD vs 0 ED 88 Mal wa ts< zs� Ll �J E � o z e z z O 1 M M I \ U z z R U f b E 19 W N xn W 3- tz o e pp®0 P a N saowaS 6uu..u15u3;o ;uawNoda(7 SNb ld IVO1d1O313 `O SV'X31 W >� "',0 1�111l7 'JNIkf�3Nl'JN3 I1S18HO sn fdoo Ln� J o `• �e 00 ���� Nd9Z1�1 jp alp S1NIVUAO JdWI ONIdmd 1N3flldd3 mI •,y 'o oo••°°Q 000° d1MM OOOMN11K y oa 0o NONdIN)ma A9 7. 'aN NOISN3tl NONE,-a 7 3LY➢ 'ON N.- VZ'ZZ'LL SNV'-ld 43M:j0dN00 ui Cl LLJ '� of � � 0 F \ w LLJ EK / 3 n 33 /-r33 D j O J n NOYiI dWfld O JNMMJA 01 Z U I El: I o N w G d xs � Z$ - ✓ new nary ry �aeu i u Z 3 Q � I W I I Q N I :z W 77 W 0 pp®0 P N saowaS 6uu..u15u3;o ;uawNoda(7 SN01035 aNb' 0 o° SNOIIVAT3 1d01b10313 g N g C� •w '�w: SV'X31 Coe _ IISRIHD S(id2/0o col 3< J W \✓e o��• m °�; 0°c ���'�' NV9�1�1 jp 111J S1NIVIIAOJdWI ONIdmd 1N3flldd3 'o oo••°°Q 000° dMM OOOMN11K y oa 0o NONdIN0530 A9 3LV0 'ON NOI-8 NONdIY0530 A8 3LV➢ 'ON NOISN3tl VZ'ZZ'LI SNV'-ld 43W2i0dNOO o� O 3 3 V O N Q O J o'�p W>> 11VM ONINIVE8 ¢U LLJ �OwB Q S� W O Ll Z c5 8 w C) �� g TTVM z w 3 u W 3 D Z5�6 ad ��fn€� 3 r� J E D- LLJ r.•.rLr.��r� � d i O u 2 d 6;+ ED a a 8;5 ` o N� �s S a li hi n5 � V� �� �m s—p a€ w � D - �� w G Q U a � �- J a 6. 3 no U N J off' aL3 U LLJ tt Z d �tg! © V) II j6i ^ r �a E W f T. ¢'d Nod H J c5 Y �Gg S'am gua {$ O W c Apo tS r`z, i a�G F t —mw p d �7 O S saoinrag 6uuaau16u3;o ;uawNodap SOOMHOS aNd SHVdWa 3NII-3NO ,�-� 0�a`.pws pd.��o IvMiO3l3 sV'x31 S vJ 0oe 8 3 V �,°0 1�111l7 `JNRi33NIxJN3 IISRIHO S(id2/0o � J -40 1 S1NIVUAONM ONIdmd 1N3flldd3 'o oo•.°°Q o0 d1MM OOOMN11K y e oa 0o NONdIN0530 A9 3LV0 'ON N01-8 NONd,—a 17777 1'ON NOISN3tl VZ'ZZ'LI SNV'-1d 431Vi0dNOO v z° gun o wo w I 0 a 1\ y N WJ l 1 ` o •I I/\min//I /,/ d yt O T ti o d o R o� z �—o & o o < � QQ 3S21nOp d109 r w 1. w a Q n z Yv �Q ;wK3 Wnd 3 noo loo Ra 8= � . z �Eao a � o €- 03 _ 6 Gp Aga 3 w Runs& No Mg o � e pp®0 P N saoinlag 6uuaau16u3;o ;uawNodap 0 °°5$ °p7 N� SlIb13a lVoIblO313 `O g "n R S11X31 � 3 Do^ 1A111l7 `JNRi33NIxJN3 IISRI40 S(id2/0� oo J n-- ... Nd9�in jp 111� S1NIVUAO?dHl ONIdmd 1Nimij3 oo° d1MM OOOMN11K pp p h z Om-ma I'ON N01-8 NOad,—a 78 3LVa 'ON Np5N3tl VZ'ZZ'LL SNV'-1d 43W2i0dNOO v S g - a � Hk o �a �a e �gp6s d d cn 5 O F U d o _ c� c> 1 ED t C s a -----{ I z 1\ W a D Q 9 m I I J o LLJ CL U ai LLJ 3Po G �N Z 3 � D WB �_ S ="a ma • Z BY6 `�� � � $ Fnr '� o ZO � ' O m g8 •e D O Ee X N Z U' w Z mS NIW,9C MQ13e aW A009 tl0J('NIW),4Z F 3 e 9 8 o e